Canon EOS 60D User Manual

ENGLISH  
INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
Introduction  
The EOS 60D is a high-performance, digital single-lens reflex camera  
featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx. 18.0 effective  
megapixels, DIGIC 4, high-precision and high-speed 9-point AF,  
approx. 5.3 fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting, and Full HD  
(Full High-Definition) movie shooting.  
The camera is highly responsive for shooting at anytime, provides many  
functions fitted for advanced shooting, and offers many other features.  
Take Test Shots to Familiarize Yourself with the Camera  
With a digital camera, you can immediately view the image you have  
captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how  
they come out. You can then better understand the camera.  
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the Safety Warnings  
(p.305, 306) and Handling Precautions (p.12, 13).  
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability  
After shooting, playback and check whether the images have been  
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the  
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon  
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.  
Copyrights  
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded  
images of people and certain subjects for anything but private  
enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions,  
etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.  
This camera is compatible with SD memory cards, SDHC memory  
cards, and SDXC memory cards. This manual will refer to all these  
cards as just “card.”  
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images.  
Please purchase it separately.  
2
Item Check List  
Before starting, check that all the following items have been included  
with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.  
Camera  
(with eyecup and  
body cap)  
Battery Pack  
LP-E6  
(with protective cover)  
Battery Charger  
LC-E6/LC-E6E*  
Interface Cable  
Stereo AV Cable  
AVC-DC400ST  
Wide Strap  
EW-EOS60D  
EOS DIGITAL  
Solution Disk  
(Software)  
EOS DIGITAL  
(1)  
(2)  
Software  
Instruction  
Manuals Disk  
(1) Camera Instruction Manual  
(this booklet)  
(2) Pocket Guide  
* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a  
power cord.)  
  If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lens is included.  
  Depending on the Lens Kit type, the lens instruction manual might also be  
included.  
  Be careful not to lose any of the above items.  
EOS DIGITAL Software Instruction Manuals Disk  
The Software Instruction Manuals are on the CD-ROM as PDF files.  
See page 313 for instructions on using the Software Instruction  
Manuals Disk.  
3
Conventions Used in this Manual  
Icons in this Manual  
<6>  
: Indicates the Main Dial.  
<5>  
: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.  
<9> <V> <U> : Indicates the Multi-controller and the push  
direction.  
<0>  
: Indicates the setting button.  
0, 9, 7, 8 : Indicates that the respective function remains  
active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec.  
respectively after you let go of the button.  
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,  
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the  
LCD monitor.  
3 : Indicates a function which can be changed by pressing the  
<M> button and changing the setting.  
M
: If shown on the upper right of the page, it indicates that the  
function is available only in the Creative Zone modes (p.20).  
(p.**) : Reference page numbers for more information.  
: Tip or advice for better shooting.  
: Problem-solving advice.  
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.  
: Supplemental information.  
Basic Assumptions  
 All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch  
is already set to <1> (p.28).  
 It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are  
set to the default.  
 For explanatory purposes, the instructions show the camera attached  
with an EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS lens.  
4
Chapters  
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s  
basic operations and shooting procedures.  
2
23  
Introduction  
Getting Started  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
53  
Basic Shooting  
75  
Setting the AF and Drive Modes  
83  
Image Settings  
111  
Advanced Operations  
129  
151  
171  
189  
219  
229  
235  
249  
265  
309  
5
Flash Photography  
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)  
Shooting Movies  
Image Playback  
Post-Processing Images  
Sensor Cleaning  
Printing Images  
Customizing the Camera  
Reference  
End Pages: Software Start Guide and Instruction Manual Index  
Contents  
Introduction  
2
Item Check List.................................................................................................. 3  
Conventions Used in this Manual...................................................................... 4  
Chapters............................................................................................................ 5  
Index to Features ............................................................................................ 10  
Handling Precautions ...................................................................................... 12  
Quick Start Guide............................................................................................ 14  
Nomenclature.................................................................................................. 16  
Getting Started  
23  
1
Charging the Battery ....................................................................................... 24  
Installing and Removing the Battery................................................................ 26  
Using the LCD Monitor .................................................................................... 27  
Turning on the Power...................................................................................... 28  
Setting the Date and Time............................................................................... 30  
Selecting the Interface Language.................................................................... 31  
Installing and Removing the SD Card ............................................................. 32  
Attaching and Detaching a Lens ..................................................................... 34  
Using the Lens Hood....................................................................................... 37  
About the Lens Image Stabilizer...................................................................... 38  
Basic Operation............................................................................................... 39  
Q Using the Quick Control Screen ................................................................ 44  
3 Menu Operations................................................................................... 46  
Before You Start.............................................................................................. 48  
Formatting the Card ..................................................................................... 48  
Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off.................................................. 50  
Setting the Image Review Time ................................................................... 50  
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings.............................................. 51  
Basic Shooting  
53  
2
1 Fully Automatic Shooting .......................................................................... 54  
1 Full Auto Techniques ................................................................................ 56  
7 Disabling Flash.......................................................................................... 58  
C Creative Auto Shooting ............................................................................. 59  
2 Shooting Portraits....................................................................................... 62  
3 Shooting Landscapes................................................................................ 63  
4 Shooting Close-ups .................................................................................... 64  
5 Shooting Moving Subjects......................................................................... 65  
6 Shooting Portraits at Night ......................................................................... 66  
Q Quick Control Screen................................................................................. 67  
Shoot by Ambience Selection.......................................................................... 68  
6
Contents  
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type.....................................................................71  
Setting the AF and Drive Modes  
75  
3
f: Selecting the AF Mode..............................................................................76  
S Selecting the AF Point ...............................................................................78  
When Autofocus Fails ......................................................................................80  
MF: Manual Focusing ...................................................................................80  
i Selecting the Drive Mode...........................................................................81  
j Using the Self-timer ....................................................................................82  
Image Settings  
83  
4
Setting the Image-recording Quality.................................................................84  
i: Setting the ISO Speed..............................................................................88  
A Selecting a Picture Style..........................................................................90  
A Customizing a Picture Style.....................................................................92  
A Registering a Picture Style.......................................................................94  
Setting the White Balance................................................................................96  
O Custom White Balance...........................................................................97  
P Setting the Color Temperature.................................................................98  
u White Balance Correction ...........................................................................99  
Auto Lighting Optimizer..................................................................................101  
Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction .........................................................102  
Creating and Selecting a Folder.....................................................................104  
File Numbering Methods................................................................................106  
Setting Copyright Information.........................................................................108  
Setting the Color Space .................................................................................110  
Advanced Operations  
111  
5
d: Program AE..............................................................................................112  
s: Shutter-Priority AE .................................................................................114  
f: Aperture-Priority AE...............................................................................116  
Depth of Field Preview................................................................................117  
a: Manual Exposure.....................................................................................118  
q Selecting the Metering Mode ...................................................................119  
Setting Exposure Compensation....................................................................120  
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ............................................................121  
A AE Lock ....................................................................................................122  
F: Bulb Exposures ........................................................................................123  
Mirror Lockup .................................................................................................125  
R Remote Control Shooting............................................................................126  
Q Displaying the Electronic Level ..............................................................127  
7
Contents  
Flash Photography  
129  
6
7
D Using the Built-in Flash.............................................................................. 130  
Setting the Flash ........................................................................................... 135  
Using Wireless Flash..................................................................................... 139  
External Speedlites ....................................................................................... 148  
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)  
151  
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ............................................................... 152  
Shooting Function Settings ........................................................................... 156  
z Menu Function Settings........................................................................... 157  
Using AF to Focus......................................................................................... 160  
Focusing Manually......................................................................................... 167  
Shooting Movies  
171  
8
9
k Shooting Movies...................................................................................... 172  
Shooting Function Settings ........................................................................... 179  
Setting the Movie-recording Size................................................................... 180  
Menu Function Settings................................................................................. 182  
Image Playback  
189  
x Image Playback....................................................................................... 190  
B Shooting Information Display .............................................................. 191  
H I Searching for Images Quickly ............................................................ 194  
u/y Magnified View................................................................................... 196  
b Rotating the Image................................................................................... 197  
Setting Ratings.............................................................................................. 198  
Q Quick Control During Playback................................................................ 200  
k Enjoying Movies ...................................................................................... 202  
k Playing Movies ........................................................................................ 204  
X Editing the Movie’s First and Last Scenes ............................................... 206  
Slide Show (Auto Playback).......................................................................... 207  
Viewing the Images on TV............................................................................. 209  
K Protecting Images................................................................................... 213  
L Erasing Images......................................................................................... 215  
Changing Image Playback Settings............................................................... 217  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................................... 217  
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images................................................................ 218  
Post-Processing Images  
219  
10  
Creative Filters ........................................................................................ 220  
8
Contents  
S Resize ......................................................................................................222  
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera ............................................224  
Sensor Cleaning  
229  
11  
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning....................................................................230  
Appending Dust Delete Data..........................................................................231  
Manual Sensor Cleaning................................................................................233  
Printing Images  
235  
12  
Preparing to Print ...........................................................................................236  
wPrinting......................................................................................................238  
Trimming the Image ....................................................................................243  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)...........................................................245  
W Direct Printing with DPOF ........................................................................248  
Customizing the Camera  
249  
13  
14  
Setting Custom Functions..............................................................................250  
Custom Functions ..........................................................................................251  
Custom Function Settings..............................................................................252  
C.Fn I : Exposure .....................................................................................252  
C.Fn II : Image...........................................................................................254  
C.Fn III : Autofocus/Drive ...........................................................................255  
C.Fn IV : Operation/Others .........................................................................257  
Registering My Menu .....................................................................................261  
w: Register Camera User Settings................................................................262  
Reference  
265  
B Button Functions..................................................................................266  
Checking the Battery Information...................................................................268  
Using a Household Power Outlet...................................................................272  
Using Eye-Fi Cards........................................................................................273  
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes .............................276  
Menu Settings ................................................................................................278  
Troubleshooting Guide...................................................................................283  
Error Codes....................................................................................................291  
System Map ...................................................................................................292  
Specifications.................................................................................................294  
Safety Warnings.............................................................................................305  
End Pages: Software Start Guide and Instruction Manual Index  
309  
Software Start Guide......................................................................................310  
Index ..............................................................................................................314  
9
Index to Features  
 White balance  
Î p.96  
Power  
 Battery  
 Color space  
Î p.110  
• Charging  
• Battery check  
Î p.24  
Î p.29  
 Image enhancement features  
• Auto Lighting Optimizer Î p.101  
• Lens peripheral illumination  
Battery information check Î p.268  
 Power outlet  
 Auto power off  
Î p.272  
correction  
Î p.102  
• Noise reduction  
for long exposures  
• Noise reduction  
for high ISO speeds  
• Highlight tone priority  
Î p.50  
Î p.254  
Lens  
Î p.254  
Î p.255  
 Attaching/Detaching  
 Zoom  
Î p.34  
Î p.35  
Î p.38  
AF  
 Image Stabilizer  
 AF mode  
Î p.76  
Î p.78  
Î p.80  
Basic Settings  
 Language  
 AF point selection  
 Manual focusing  
Î p.31  
 Date/Time  
Î p.30  
Drive  
 Using the LCD monitor Î p.27  
 Drive modes  
 Maximum burst  
Î p.81  
 LCD brightness  
adjustment  
Î p.217  
Î p.87  
 Beeper  
Î p.278  
Shooting  
 Release shutter without  
 Electronic level  
 Quick Control screen  
 Creative Auto  
 Program AE  
Î p.127  
Î p.44  
card  
Î p.32  
Recording Images  
 Format  
Î p.59  
Î p.48  
Î p.112  
Î p.114  
Î p.116  
Î p.118  
Î p.123  
Î p.125  
Î p.119  
 Create/select a folder  
 File No.  
Î p.104  
Î p.106  
 Shutter-priority AE  
 Aperture-priority AE  
 Manual exposure  
 Bulb  
Image Quality  
 Image-recording quality Î p.84  
 Mirror lockup  
 Metering mode  
 ISO speed  
 Picture Style  
10  
Î p.88  
Î p.90  
Index to Features  
 Self-timer  
Î p.82  
Image Playback  
 Remote control  
Î p.126  
 Image review time  
Î p.50  
 Single image display  
• Shooting information  
display  
Î p.190  
Exposure Adjustments  
 Exposure compensation Î p.120  
Î p.191  
 Movie playback  
Î p.204  
 AEB  
Î p.121  
 Editing out movie first/last  
 AE lock  
Î p.122  
scene  
Î p.206  
Flash  
 Index display  
Î p.194  
 Built-in flash  
• Flash exposure  
compensation  
• FE lock  
Î p.130  
 Image browsing  
(Jump display)  
Î p.195  
Î p.196  
Î p.207  
Î p.209  
Î p.213  
Î p.215  
Î p.132  
Î p.134  
 Magnified view  
 Slide show  
 Viewing images on TV  
 Protect  
 External flash  
Î p.148  
 Flash control  
Î p.135  
• Wireless flash  
Î p.139  
 Erase  
Live View Shooting  
 Live View shooting  
 Focusing  
Image Editing  
 Creative filters  
 Resize  
Î p.151  
Î p.160  
Î p.157  
Î p.158  
Î p.157  
Î p.159  
Î p.220  
Î p.222  
 Multiple aspect ratios  
 Exposure simulation  
 Grid display  
 RAW image processing Î p.224  
Customization  
 Custom Functions (C.Fn)Î p.250  
 Silent shooting  
 My Menu  
Î p.261  
Shooting Movies  
 Movie shooting  
 Manual exposure  
 Sound recording  
 Camera user setting  
Î p.171  
Î p.174  
Î p.184  
registration  
Î p.262  
Viewfinder  
 Dioptric adjustment  
 Electronic level  
Î p.39  
Î p.128  
 Changing the focusing  
screen  
Î p.259  
11  
Handling Precautions  
Camera Care  
  This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical  
shock.  
  The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you  
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult your nearest  
Canon Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth. If the  
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.  
  Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such  
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near  
anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna. Strong  
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.  
  Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight.  
High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.  
  The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to  
disassemble the camera yourself.  
  Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and  
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean  
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest  
Canon Service Center.  
  Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to  
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera  
misoperation.  
  If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,  
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent  
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to  
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.  
  If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid  
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and  
battery from the camera, and wait until the condensation has evaporated  
before using the camera.  
  If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery  
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the  
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to  
check that the camera is still working.  
  Avoid storing the camera where there are corrosive chemicals such as a  
darkroom or chemical lab.  
  If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions  
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is  
an important shoot coming up, have the camera checked by your Canon  
dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.  
12  
Handling Precautions  
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor  
  Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision  
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there might be a few dead  
pixels among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels. Dead pixels displaying  
only black or red, etc., are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images  
recorded.  
  If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur  
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only  
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.  
  In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow or it  
might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.  
Cards  
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:  
  Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,  
physical shock, or vibration.  
  Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field  
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having  
static electricity.  
  Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.  
  Store the card in a case.  
  Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.  
Lens  
After detaching the lens from the camera, attach the lens  
caps or put down the lens with the rear end up to avoid  
scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.  
Contacts  
Cautions During Prolonged Use  
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a  
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. Although this is not a  
malfunction, holding the hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin  
burns.  
13  
Quick Start Guide  
Insert the battery. (p.26)  
To charge the battery, see page 24.  
1
White index  
Red index Attach the lens. (p.34)  
2
3
4
5
Align the lens’ white or red index with  
the camera’s index in the matching  
color.  
Set the lens focus mode switch  
to <AF>. (p.34)  
Open the slot cover and  
insert a card. (p.32)  
With the card’s label facing you,  
insert it into the slot.  
Set the power switch to <1>  
(p.28), and while holding down  
the button at the center of the  
Mode Dial, turn the dial to <1>  
(Full Auto). (p.54)  
14  
Quick Start Guide  
Flip out the LCD monitor. (p.27)  
6
7
Focus the subject. (p.40)  
Look through the viewfinder and aim  
the viewfinder center over the subject.  
Press the shutter button halfway, and  
the camera will focus the subject.  
If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-  
up automatically.  
Take the picture. (p.40)  
Press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture.  
8
9
Review the picture. (p.50)  
The captured image will be displayed  
for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.  
To display the image again, press the  
<x> button (p.190).  
  To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 57.  
  To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.190).  
  To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.215).  
15  
Nomenclature  
For detailed information, reference page numbers are provided in parentheses (p.**)  
.
<R> Drive mode  
selection button (p.81)  
<f> AF mode selection button (p.76)  
LCD panel (p.18)  
EF lens mount index (p.34)  
<i> ISO speed  
setting button (p.88)  
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam  
(p.130/79)  
<n> Metering mode  
selection button (p.119)  
EF-S lens mount index (p.34)  
Flash-sync contacts  
Hot shoe (p.148)  
<6> Main Dial  
(p.41)  
Microphone (p.172)  
<U> LCD panel  
illumination button  
(p.43)  
Mode Dial lock-release  
button (p.41)  
Shutter button  
(p.40)  
Mode Dial (p.20)  
Speaker (p.204)  
Red-eye  
reduction/  
Self-timer lamp  
(p.131/82)  
Strap mount  
(p.23)  
Remote control  
sensor (p.126)  
<D> Flash  
button  
(p.129)  
Grip  
(Battery  
Terminal cover  
compartment)  
DC coupler cord  
hole (p.272)  
Lens release  
button (p.35)  
Depth-of-field preview  
button (p.117)  
Lens lock pin  
Lens mount  
Mirror (p.125, 233)  
Contacts (p.13)  
External microphone IN terminal (p.184)  
HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.209)  
Audio/video OUT/Digital terminal  
(p.212, 236)  
Remote control terminal (p.124)  
Body cap (p.34)  
16  
Nomenclature  
<A> Live View shooting/  
Movie shooting button (p.152/172)  
<p> AF start button  
(p.40, 153, 173)  
<V> Focal plane mark  
<A/I>  
<M> Menu button (p.46)  
AE lock/FE lock button/  
Index/Reduce button  
(p.122/134/194/196, 243)  
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.39)  
Eyecup (p.124)  
<S/u>  
Viewfinder eyepiece  
AF point selection/  
Magnify button  
(p.78/196, 243)  
Power switch (p.28)  
Strap mount  
(p.23)  
<L> Erase  
button (p.215)  
<Q> Quick  
Control  
button (p.44)  
Card slot  
cover (p.32)  
Battery  
compartment  
cover release  
lever (p.26)  
LCD monitor (p.27, 217)  
Tripod socket  
Battery  
<x> Playback button (p.190)  
compartment  
cover (p.26)  
<B> Info button  
(p.127, 154, 176, 190, 266)  
Access lamp (p.33)  
<9> Multi-controller (p.43)  
<R/l>  
Quick Control Dial lock-release button/  
Direct print button (p.42/241)  
<5> Quick Control Dial (p.42)  
<0> Setting button (p.46)  
Card slot (p.32)  
17  
Nomenclature  
LCD Panel  
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.255)  
<g> ISO speed (p.88)  
ISO speed (p.88)  
Shots remaining  
Shots remaining  
during WB bracketing  
Self-timer countdown  
Bulb exposure time  
Drive mode (p.81)  
u
Single shooting  
o
High-speed continuous  
shooting  
i
Low-speed continuous  
shooting  
Q
k
10 sec. Self-timer/  
Remote control  
2 sec. Self-timer/  
Remote control  
Metering mode (p.119)  
q
w
r
e
Evaluative metering  
Partial metering  
Spot metering  
Center-weighted  
average metering  
AF mode (p.76)  
X
One-Shot AF  
9
AI Focus AF  
Z
AI Servo AF  
4 L  
Manual focus  
<h> AEB  
(p.121)  
Battery check (p.29)  
Exposure level indicator  
Exposure compensation  
amount (p.120)  
<0>  
Monochrome shooting  
(p.91)  
AEB range (p.121)  
Flash exposure compensation  
amount (p.132)  
<u> White balance  
correction (p.99)  
<y> Flash exposure  
Card writing status  
Electronic level  
compensation (p.132)  
Aperture  
Shutter speed  
Busy (buSY)  
Built-in flash recycling (buSY)  
- - -  
- ])  
- - -  
AF point selection ([ -  
-
Card full warning (FuLL)  
Card error warning (Err)  
No card warning (Card)  
Error code (Err)  
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)  
The display will show only the settings currently applied.  
18  
Nomenclature  
Viewfinder Information  
AF points  
(Superimposed display)  
Focusing screen  
Spot metering circle  
<g>  
ISO speed  
<u>  
White balance  
correction  
<o> Focus  
<
> Battery check  
confirmation  
light  
<A> AE lock/  
AEB in-progress  
Max. burst  
<0> Monochrome  
shooting  
<D> Flash-ready  
Improper FE lock  
ISO speed  
<A> Highlight tone priority  
Exposure level indicator  
Exposure compensation amount  
Flash exposure compensation amount  
AEB range  
Red-eye reduction lamp-on indicator  
Electronic level  
warning  
<e> High-speed sync  
(FP flash)  
<d> FE lock/  
FEB in-progress  
<y> Flash exposure  
compensation  
Card full warning (FuLL)  
Shutter speed  
Card error warning (Err)  
FE lock (FEL)  
No card warning (Card)  
Busy (buSY)  
Built-in flash recycling (D buSY)  
Aperture  
The display will show only the settings currently applied.  
19  
Nomenclature  
Mode Dial  
Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial lock-release  
button at the center.  
Camera User Setting  
You can register the shooting  
Creative Zone  
mode (d/s/f/a/F), AF  
mode, menu settings, etc., in  
this Mode Dial setting and  
shoot (p.262).  
These modes give you more  
control for shooting various  
subjects.  
d
: Program AE (p.112)  
s : Shutter-priority AE (p.114)  
f : Aperture-priority AE (p.116)  
a : Manual exposure (p.118)  
F
: Bulb (p.123)  
Basic Zone  
All you do is press the shutter  
button. Fully-automatic shooting  
suiting the subject.  
1: Full Auto (p.54)  
7: Flash Off (p.58)  
C: Creative Auto (p.59)  
Image Zone  
2 : Portrait (p.62)  
3: Landscape (p.63)  
4 : Close-up (p.64)  
5: Sports (p.65)  
6 : Night Portrait (p.66)  
k: Movieshooting  
(p.171)  
20  
Nomenclature  
Lens  
Lens with a distance scale  
Focus mode switch (p.34)  
Hood mount  
(p.37)  
Zoom position index (p.35)  
Distance scale  
Filter thread  
(front of lens) (p.301)  
Zoom ring (p.35)  
Focusing ring (p.80, 167)  
Image Stabilizer switch (p.38)  
Contacts (p.13)  
Lens mount index (p.34)  
Lens without a distance scale  
Focusing ring (p.80, 167)  
Hood mount  
(p.37)  
Focus mode switch (p.34)  
Zoom position index (p.35)  
Filter thread  
(front of lens) (p.301)  
Zoom ring (p.35)  
Image Stabilizer switch (p.38)  
Lens mount index (p.34)  
Contacts (p.13)  
21  
Nomenclature  
Battery Charger LC-E6  
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6 (p.24).  
Power plug  
Battery pack slot  
Charge lamp  
This power unit is intended to be correctly orientated in a vertical or  
floor mount position.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter  
of the proper configuration for the power outlet.  
Battery Charger LC-E6E  
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6 (p.24).  
Power cord  
Charge lamp  
Battery pack slot  
Power cord socket  
22  
1
Getting Started  
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start  
shooting and basic camera operations.  
Attaching the Strap  
Pass the end of the strap through  
the camera’s strap mount eyelet  
from the bottom. Then pass it  
through the strap’s buckle as shown  
in the illustration. Pull the strap to  
take up any slack and make sure  
the strap will not loosen from the  
buckle.  
  The eyepiece cover is also  
attached to the strap (p.124).  
Eyepiece cover  
23  
Charging the Battery  
Remove the protective cover.  
1
Attach the battery.  
2
  As shown in the illustration, attach the  
battery securely to the charger.  
  To detach the battery, follow the  
above procedure in reverse.  
Recharge the battery.  
For LC-E6  
  As shown by the arrow, flip out the  
battery charger’s prongs and insert  
the prongs into a power outlet.  
LC-E6  
3
For LC-E6E  
LC-E6E  
  Connect the power cord to the  
charger and insert the plug into the  
power outlet.  
X Recharging starts automatically and  
the charge lamp blinks in orange.  
Charge Lamp  
Charge Level  
Color  
Indicator  
0 - 49%  
50 - 74%  
75% or higher  
Fully charged  
Blinks once per second  
Blinks twice per second  
Blinks three times per second  
Lights on  
Orange  
Green  
 
It takes approx. 2.5 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted  
battery at 23°C / 73°F. The time required to recharge the battery  
depends on the ambient temperature and battery’s charge level.  
  For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /  
41°F - 50°F) will take a longer time (up to 4 hours).  
24  
Charging the Battery  
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger  
 
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.  
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its power.  
  After recharging the battery, detach it and detach the charger  
from the power outlet.  
  You can attach the cover in a different  
orientation to indicate whether the battery  
has been recharged or not.  
If the battery has been recharged, attach the  
cover so that the battery-shaped hole <  
> is  
aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is  
exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.  
  When not using the camera, remove the battery.  
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount  
of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter  
battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing  
the battery after it is fully charged can lower the battery’s performance.  
  The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.  
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz  
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for  
the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage  
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.  
  If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully  
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.  
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.268) and purchase a  
new battery.  
  After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for  
at least 3 sec.  
  If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.268) is 94% or higher, the battery  
will not be recharged.  
 
The charger cannot charge any battery other than the Battery Pack LP-E6.  
25  
Installing and Removing the Battery  
Installing the Battery  
Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6 into the camera.  
Open the battery compartment  
cover.  
  Slide the lever as shown by the arrow  
1
2
3
and open the cover.  
Insert the battery.  
  Insert the end with the battery  
contacts.  
  Insert the battery until it locks in  
place.  
Close the cover.  
  Press the cover until it snaps shut.  
Only the Battery Pack LP-E6 can be used.  
Removing the Battery  
Open the cover and remove the  
battery.  
  Press the battery release lever as  
shown by the arrow and remove the  
battery.  
  To prevent short circuiting of the  
battery contacts, be sure to attach the  
protective cover to the battery.  
26  
Using the LCD Monitor  
After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live  
View shooting, shoot movies, and playback images and movies. You  
can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.  
Flip out the LCD monitor.  
1
Rotate the LCD monitor.  
  When the LCD monitor is swung out,  
180°  
2
90°  
you can rotate it up or down or face it  
forward toward the subject.  
  The indicated angle is only  
175°  
approximate.  
Face it toward you.  
3
  Normally, face the LCD monitor  
toward you.  
Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor.  
  When not using the camera, fold the LCD monitor back with the screen  
facing inward. This will protect the screen.  
  During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor  
toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen.  
  Depending on the angle of the LCD monitor, the display may turn off right  
before the LCD monitor is folded back.  
27  
Turning on the Power  
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time setting screen  
appears, see page 30 to set the date/time.  
<1> : The camera turns on.  
<2> : The camera is turned off and  
does not operate. Set to this  
position when not using the  
camera.  
About the Automatic Self-Cleaning Sensor  
  Whenever you set the power switch  
to <1> or <2>, the sensor  
cleaning will be executed  
automatically (A small sound may be  
heard). During the sensor cleaning,  
the LCD monitor will display <f>.  
  Even during the sensor cleaning, you can still shoot by pressing the  
shutter button halfway (p.40) to stop the sensor cleaning and take a  
picture.  
  If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short  
interval, the <f> icon might not be displayed. This is normal and  
not a problem.  
About Auto Power Off  
  To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after  
approx. 1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just  
press the shutter button halfway (p.40).  
  You can change the auto power-off time with the menu’s [5 Auto  
power off] setting (p.50).  
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to  
the card, [Recording ...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after  
the card finishes recording the image.  
28  
Turning on the Power  
Checking the Battery Level  
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be  
indicated in one of six levels: A blinking battery icon (b) indicates  
that the battery will be exhausted soon.  
Icon  
Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10 9 - 1  
0
Battery Life  
Temperature  
At 23°C / 73°F  
Approx. 1600 shots  
Approx. 1100 shots  
At 0°C / 32°F  
No Flash  
Approx. 1400 shots  
Approx. 1000 shots  
50% Flash Use  
  The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, no Live  
View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing  
standards.  
  Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E9  
• With LP-E6 x 2: Approx. twice the shots without the battery grip.  
• With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries (at 23°C / 73°F): Approx. 550 shots  
without flash use, or approx. 410 shots with 50% flash use.  
  The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following  
operations:  
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.  
• Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.  
• Using the LCD monitor often.  
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.  
  The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on  
the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.  
  For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 153.  
  See the [7 Battery info.] menu to further check the battery’s condition  
(p.268).  
  If size-AA/LR6 batteries are used in Battery Grip BG-E9, a four-level  
indicator will be displayed. ([x/m] will not be displayed.)  
29  
3 Setting the Date and Time  
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time has been reset, the  
Date/Time setting screen will appear. Follow steps 3 and 4 to set the date/time.  
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based  
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.  
Display the menu.  
  Press the <M> button to display  
1
the menu.  
Under the [6] tab, select [Date/  
2 Time].  
  Press the <U> key on the <9> to  
select the [6] tab.  
  Press the <V> key on the <9> to  
select [Date/Time], then press <0>.  
Set the date and time.  
3
  Press the <U> key on the <9> to  
select the date or time number.  
  Press <0> so <r> is displayed.  
  Press the <V> key on the <9> to  
set the number, then press <0>.  
(Returns to s.)  
Exit the setting.  
  Press the <U> key on the <9> to  
select [OK], then press <0>.  
X The date/time will be set and the  
menu will reappear.  
4
If you store the camera without the battery or if the camera’s battery becomes  
exhausted, the date/time might be reset. If this happens, set the date/time again.  
The date/time set will start from when you press <0> in step 4.  
30  
3 Selecting the Interface Language  
Display the menu.  
  Press the <M> button to display  
1
the menu.  
Under the [6] tab, select  
2 [LanguageK].  
  Press the <U> key on the <9> to  
select the [6] tab.  
  Press the <V> key on the <9> to  
select [LanguageK] (the third item  
from the top), then press <0>.  
Set the desired language.  
3
  Press the <V> key on the <9> to  
select the language, then press  
<0>.  
X The interface language will change.  
31  
Installing and Removing the SD Card  
The camera is compatible with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards.  
The captured images are recorded onto the card (sold separately).  
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to  
enable writing/erasing.  
Installing the Card  
Open the cover.  
  Slide the cover as shown by the  
1
arrows to open it.  
Write-protect switch  
Insert the card.  
2
 
As shown by the illustration, face  
the top of the card toward you.  
  Insert the card straight in all the way.  
Close the cover.  
3
  Close the cover and slide it in the  
direction shown by the arrows until it  
snaps shut.  
  When you set the power switch to  
<1>, the access lamp will blink and  
the number of possible shots will be  
displayed on the LCD panel.  
Possible shots  
  The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the  
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.  
  Setting the [1 Release shutter without card] menu option to [Disable]  
will prevent you from forgetting to install a card (p.278).  
32  
Installing and Removing the SD Card  
Removing the Card  
Open the cover.  
Access lamp  
1
  Set the power switch to <2>.  
  Check that “Recording...” is not  
displayed on the LCD monitor.  
  Make sure the access lamp is off,  
then open the cover.  
Remove the card.  
  Gently push in the card, then let go.  
The card will stick out.  
2
  Pull the card straight out, then close  
the cover.  
 
When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that the images  
are being written to or read by the card, being erased, or data is  
being transferred. While the access lamp is lit or blinking, never do  
any of the following. Doing so may damage the image data. It may  
also damage the card or camera.  
Opening the card slot cover.  
Removing the battery.  
• Shaking or banging the camera around.  
  If the card already contains recorded images, the image number might  
not start from 0001 (p.106).  
  Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.  
  If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove  
and reinstall the card. If the error persists, use a different card.  
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all  
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.48). The card  
may then return to normal.  
  SDHC and SDXC cards featuring UHS (Ultra High Speed) enable a  
maximum writing speed of SD Speed Class 10.  
33  
Attaching and Detaching a Lens  
Attaching a Lens  
Remove the caps.  
  Remove the rear lens cap and the  
1
body cap by turning them as shown  
by the arrows.  
White index  
Attach the lens.  
2
  Align the lens’ red or white index with  
the camera’s index matching the  
same color. Turn the lens as shown  
by the arrow until it snaps in place.  
Red index  
On the lens, set the focus mode  
3 switch to <AF> (autofocus).  
  If it is set to <MF> (manual focus),  
autofocus will not operate.  
Remove the front lens cap.  
4
34  
Attaching and Detaching a Lens  
Minimizing Dust  
  When changing lenses, do it in a place with minimal dust.  
  When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the  
body cap to the camera.  
  Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.  
About Zooming  
To zoom, turn the zoom ring on the lens  
with your fingers.  
If you want to zoom, do it before  
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after  
achieving focus may throw off the  
focus slightly.  
Detaching the Lens  
While pressing the lens release  
button, turn the lens as shown by  
the arrow.  
  Turn the lens until it stops, then  
detach it.  
  Attach the rear lens cap to the  
detached lens.  
35  
Attaching and Detaching a Lens  
To owners of the EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS lens:  
You can prevent the lens from extending  
out while you are carrying it around. Set  
the zoom ring to the 18mm wide-angle  
end, then slide the zoom ring lock lever  
to <LOCK>. The zoom ring can be  
locked only at the wide-angle end.  
  Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause  
loss of vision.  
  If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do  
not touch the rotating part.  
Image Conversion Factor  
Image sensor size  
Since the image sensor size is  
(22.3 x 14.9 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)  
smaller than the 35mm film  
35mm image size  
format, it will look like the lens  
(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)  
focal length is increased by 1.6x.  
36  
Using the Lens Hood  
When a lens hood is attached to the lens, it can reduce image ghosting  
or flare by blocking stray light. The lens hood can also protect the front  
of the lens from raindrops, snow, dust, etc.  
Although the lens hood is usually sold separately, certain lens kit  
configurations have it included.  
Attaching a Lens Hood without Index Marks  
Attach the lens hood.  
  Turn the lens hood as shown by the  
arrow until it attaches securely.  
Attaching a Lens Hood with Index Marks  
Align the red index marks on the  
lens hood and lens.  
  Align the red index marks <o> on  
the lens hood and on the front of the  
lens.  
1
Attach the lens hood.  
2
  Turn the lens hood as shown by the  
arrow until the hood’s < > mark  
aligns with the lens’ <o> mark.  
  To detach the lens hood, grasp the base of the hood when turning it.  
Grasping the hood’s edges when turning it may deform the hood.  
  If the lens hood is not properly attached, the hood might appear in the  
picture with the image periphery looking dark.  
  Before using the built-in flash, detach the lens hood. Otherwise, the lens  
hood may partially block the flash and cause a darkened area in the  
picture.  
The hood can be mounted in reverse on the lens for storage.  
37  
About the Lens Image Stabilizer  
When you use the IS lens’ built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is  
corrected to obtain a less blurred shot. The procedure explained here is  
based on the EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS lens as an example.  
* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.  
Set the IS switch to <1>.  
1
  Set also the camera’s power switch to  
<1>.  
Press the shutter button halfway.  
2
X The Image Stabilizer will operate.  
Take the picture.  
  When the picture looks steady in the  
3
viewfinder, press the shutter button  
completely to take the picture.  
  The Image Stabilizer may not be effective if the subject moves at the time  
of exposure.  
  The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as  
on a rocking boat.  
  The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens focus mode switch set to  
either <AF> or <MF>.  
  If the camera is mounted on a tripod, you can save battery power by  
switching the IS switch to <2>.  
  The Image Stabilizer can operate even when the camera is mounted on  
a monopod.  
  Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the  
shooting conditions. However, the following lenses switch the IS mode  
automatically:  
• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS  
• EF-S 15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM  
• EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS  
• EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS  
38  
Basic Operation  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity  
Turn the dioptric adjustment  
knob.  
  Turn the knob left or right until the  
nine AF points in the viewfinder look  
sharp.  
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder  
image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens E (10 types, sold separately) is  
recommended.  
Holding the Camera  
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera  
shake.  
Horizontal shooting  
Vertical shooting  
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.  
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.  
3. Press the shutter button lightly with your right hand’s index finger.  
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.  
5. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.  
6. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot in front of the other.  
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 57.  
39  
Basic Operation  
Shutter Button  
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button  
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.  
Pressing halfway  
This activates autofocusing and the  
automatic exposure system that sets  
shutter speed and aperture.  
The exposure setting (shutter speed and  
aperture) is displayed on the LCD panel  
and in the viewfinder (0).  
Pressing completely  
This releases the shutter and takes the  
picture.  
Preventing Camera Shake  
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called  
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,  
note the following:  
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the previous page.  
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the  
shutter button completely.  
  In Creative Zone modes, pressing the <p> button will be the  
same as pressing the shutter button halfway.  
  If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first  
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely  
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.  
  Even during the menu display, image playback, and image recording,  
you can instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter  
button halfway.  
40  
Basic Operation  
Mode Dial  
Turn the Mode Dial while holding down  
the Mode Dial lock-release button at the  
center.  
6 Making Selections with the Main Dial  
(1) After pressing a button, turn the  
<6> dial.  
When you press a button such as <f>,  
<R>, or <i>, the respective  
function remains selected for 6 seconds  
(9). During this time, you can turn the  
<6> dial to set the desired setting.  
When the function selection turns off or if  
you press the shutter button halfway, the  
camera will be ready to shoot.  
  Use this dial to select or set the AF  
mode, drive mode, ISO speed,  
metering mode, AF point, etc.  
(2) Turn the <6> dial only.  
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD  
panel, turn the <6> dial to set the  
desired setting.  
  Use this dial to set the shutter speed,  
aperture, etc.  
41  
Basic Operation  
5 Making Selections with the Quick Control Dial  
(1) After pressing a button, turn the  
<5> dial.  
When you press a button such as <f>,  
<R>, or <i>, the respective  
function remains selected for 6 seconds  
(9). During this time, you can turn the  
<5> dial to set the desired setting.  
When the function selection turns off or if  
you press the shutter button halfway, the  
camera will be ready to shoot.  
  Use this dial to select or set the AF  
mode, drive mode, ISO speed,  
metering mode, AF point, etc.  
(2) Turn the <5> dial only.  
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD  
panel, turn the <5> dial to set the  
desired setting.  
  Use this dial to set the exposure  
compensation amount, the aperture  
setting for manual exposures, etc.  
Using the UNLOCK button  
In Creative Zone modes, you can set the [6 Lock 5] menu setting to  
[Enable] to prevent the Quick Control Dial from inadvertently turning  
and changing the following settings:  
• Exposure compensation (When shooting mode is d/s/f.)  
• Aperture setting with manual exposures  
• Aperture setting with bulb exposures  
With [Lock 5: Enable] set, the <R> button below the Quick  
Control Dial enables the [Lock 5] setting to be canceled temporarily  
so that you can change the settings above. Press the <R> button  
(0), then turn the <5> dial. (8 in movie mode.)  
42  
Basic Operation  
9 Operating the Multi-controller  
  Use it to select the AF point, correct  
the white balance, move the AF  
frame or the magnifying frame during  
Live View shooting, or scroll over the  
image during magnified view. You can  
push it in eight directions.  
  For menus and the Quick Control  
screen, the Multi-controller works  
only in the <V> and <U>  
directions.  
U LCD Panel Illumination  
Turn on (9)/off the LCD panel  
illumination by pressing the <U> button.  
During a bulb exposure, pressing the  
shutter button completely will turn off the  
LCD panel illumination.  
Displaying Shooting Settings  
After you press the <B> button a number of times, the shooting  
settings will be displayed. With the shooting settings displayed, you can  
turn the Mode Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode (p.266).  
To switch to the Quick Control screen, press the <Q> button (p.44, 67).  
To turn off the display, press the <B> button.  
43  
Q Using the Quick Control Screen  
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the  
LCD monitor. This is called the Quick Control screen.  
Display the Quick Control screen.  
  Press the <Q> button.  
X The Quick Control screen will appear  
1
(7).  
Set the desired function.  
2
  Press the <V> <U> key on the  
<9> to select the function.  
X The name of the selected function is  
displayed on the screen’s bottom.  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to  
change the setting.  
Basic Zone modes  
Creative Zone modes  
Take the picture.  
  Press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture.  
3
X The LCD monitor turns off and the  
captured image is displayed.  
In Basic Zone modes, the selectable functions may differ depending on the  
Basic Zone shooting mode (p.67).  
44  
Q Using the Quick Control Screen  
Quick Control Screen Nomenclature  
Picture Style (p.90)  
Aperture (p.116)  
Highlight tone priority* (p.255)  
Shutter speed (p.114)  
Shooting mode* (p.20)  
ISO speed (p.88)  
Drive mode (p.81)  
Exposure compensation/  
AEB setting (p.121)  
Electronic level (p.127)  
Custom Controls  
(p.257)  
Flash exposure  
compensation (p.132)  
AF mode (p.76)  
AF point (p.78)  
Image-recording quality  
(p.84)  
Metering mode (p.119)  
White balance (p.96)  
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.101)  
Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.  
Function Setting Display  
  On the Quick Control screen, select  
the function and press <0>. The  
function’s setting screen will then  
appear (except for the shutter speed  
and aperture).  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to  
change the setting. With certain  
Ð <0>  
settings, you can also press the  
<U> key to change it.  
  Press <0> to finalize the setting and  
return to the Quick Control screen.  
While on the <Q>, <  
>, or <  
>
screen, you can return to the Quick  
Control screen by pressing the  
<M> button.  
45  
3 Menu Operations  
With menus, you can set various functions such as the image-recording  
quality, date/time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, press the  
<M> button on the camera back to display the menu screen and use  
the <V> <U> keys and <0> button.  
<M> button  
<0> button  
LCD monitor  
<V> <U>  
Menu Screen  
In the Basic Zone, Creative Zone, and Movie shooting modes, the tabs  
and menu options displayed will be different.  
Basic Zone modes  
Movie shooting mode  
Creative Zone modes  
5 Set-up  
8
Custom Functions  
3 Playback  
1 Shooting  
9 My Menu  
Tab  
Menu settings  
Menu items  
46  
3 Menu Operations  
Menu Setting Procedure  
Display the menu screen.  
  Press the <M> button to display  
1
the menu screen.  
Select a tab.  
  Press the <U> key to select a  
2
3
menu tab.  
Select the desired item.  
  Press the <V> key to select the  
item, then press <0>.  
Select the setting.  
4
  Press the <V> or <U> key to  
select the desired setting. (Some  
settings require you to press either  
the <V> or <U> key to select it.)  
  The current setting is indicated in  
blue.  
Set the desired setting.  
  Press <0> to set it.  
5
6
Exit the setting.  
  Press the <M> button to return to  
the shooting settings display.  
  For Step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial. For Step 4, you can also  
turn the <5> dial depending on the setting.  
  The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have  
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.  
  A list of menu functions is on page 278.  
47  
Before You Start  
3 Formatting the Card  
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or  
computer, format the card with the camera.  
When the card is formatted, all images and data in the card will  
be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make  
sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer  
the images to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.  
Select [Format].  
  Under the [5] tab, select [Format],  
1
then press <0>.  
Format the card.  
2
  Select [OK], then press <0>.  
X The card will be formatted.  
X When the formatting is completed,  
the menu will reappear.  
  For low-level formatting, press the  
<L> button to checkmark [Low level  
format] with <X>, then select [OK].  
48  
Before You Start  
Execute [Format] in the following cases:  
  The card is new.  
  The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.  
  The card is full with images or data.  
  A card-related error is displayed (p.291).  
About Low-level Formatting  
  Do low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems slow  
or if you want to totally erase all data in the card.  
  Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors in the card, the  
formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.  
  You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this  
case, normal formatting will have been completed and you can use the  
card as usual.  
  When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management  
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be  
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the  
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to  
prevent the data from being leaked.  
  Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software in the card must be  
installed in your computer. Then format the card with the camera.  
  The card capacity displayed on the card format screen might be smaller  
than the capacity indicated on the card.  
  This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.  
49  
Before You Start  
3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off  
You can change the auto power-off time for the camera to turn off  
automatically after a certain period of non-operation. If you do not want  
the camera to turn off automatically, set this to [Off]. After the power  
turns off, you can turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter  
button or other button.  
Select [Auto power off].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [Auto  
power off], then press <0>.  
Set the desired time.  
2
  Select the desired setting, then press  
<0>.  
Even if [Off] has been set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after  
30 min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)  
3 Setting the Image Review Time  
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor  
immediately after capture. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To  
not have the image displayed, set [Off].  
Select [Image review].  
1
  Under the [1] tab, select [Image  
review], then press <0>.  
Set the desired time.  
2
  Select the desired setting, then press  
<0>.  
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time elapses.  
50  
Before You Start  
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN  
The camera’s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to  
the default.  
Select [Clear all camera settings].  
  Under the [7] tab, select [Clear all  
1
camera settings], then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Select [OK], then press <0>.  
X Setting [Clear all camera settings]  
will reset the camera to the following  
default settings:  
2
Shooting Settings  
Image-recording Settings  
AF mode  
One-Shot AF  
Quality  
73  
AF point selection Automatic selection  
Picture Style  
Standard  
q (Evaluative  
Metering mode  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
Standard  
metering)  
ISO speed  
ISO Auto  
A (Auto)  
Peripheral  
illumination  
correction  
Enable/  
Correction  
data retained  
Max.: 3200  
Drive mode  
u (Single shooting)  
Color space  
sRGB  
Exposure  
compensation/  
AEB  
Canceled  
White balance  
Q (Auto)  
Custom white  
balance  
Canceled  
Flash exposure  
compensation  
0 (Zero)  
Disable  
WB correction  
WB-BKT  
Canceled  
Canceled  
Continuous  
Enable  
Lock 5  
Custom Functions Unchanged  
File numbering  
Auto cleaning  
Dust Delete Data  
Erased  
51  
Before You Start  
Camera Settings  
Live View Shooting Settings  
Auto power off  
Beep  
1 min.  
Live View  
Enable  
shooting  
Enable  
AF mode  
Live mode  
Off  
Release shutter  
without card  
Enable  
Grid display  
Aspect ratio  
Image review  
Highlight alert  
2 sec.  
3:2  
Disable  
Exposure  
simulation  
Enable  
AF point display Disable  
Histogram  
Brightness  
Silent shooting Mode 1  
e (10 images)  
Metering timer 16 sec.  
Image jump w/  
Auto rotate  
6
OnzD  
LCD brightness  
Date/Time  
Movie Shooting Settings  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Movie exposure Auto  
Language  
AF mode  
Live mode  
Video system  
AF w/ shutter  
button during  
Disable  
k
INFO. button  
display options  
All items selected  
Unchanged  
AF and metering  
[0]  
buttons for  
k
Camera user  
settings  
kHighlight  
tone priority  
Disable  
1920x1080  
Copyright  
information  
Unchanged  
Movie  
recording size  
Control over HDMI Disable  
Eye-Fi transmission Disable  
My Menu settings Unchanged  
Sound recording Auto  
Silent shooting Mode 1  
Metering timer 16 sec.  
Grid display  
Off  
52  
2
Basic Shooting  
This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes  
on the Mode Dial for best results.  
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot and the  
camera sets everything automatically (p.276). Also, to prevent  
botched pictures due to mistaken operations, major shooting  
settings cannot be changed in the fully-automatic modes.  
Z
c
s
About the Auto Lighting Optimizer  
In Basic Zone modes, the Auto Lighting Optimizer will adjust the  
image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and contrast.  
It is also enabled by default in Creative Zone modes (p.101).  
53  
1 Fully Automatic Shooting  
Set the Mode Dial to <1>.  
1
AF point  
Aim any AF point over the  
2 subject.  
  All the AF points will be used to focus,  
and generally the closest object will  
be focused.  
  Aiming the center AF point over the  
subject will make focusing easier.  
Focus the subject.  
3
  Press the shutter button halfway, and  
the lens focusing ring will rotate to  
focus.  
X The AF point achieving focus flashes  
briefly in red. At the same time, the  
beeper will sound and the focus  
confirmation light <o> in the  
viewfinder will light.  
X If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-  
up automatically.  
Focus confirmation light  
Take the picture.  
  Press the shutter button completely to  
4
take the picture.  
X
The captured image will be displayed  
for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.  
  If the built-in flash has popped up,  
you can push it back down with your  
fingers.  
54  
1 Fully Automatic Shooting  
FAQ  
 
The focus confirmation light  
<o  
>
blinks and focus is not achieved.  
Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then press the  
shutter button halfway (p.80). If you are too close to the subject, move  
away and try again.  
  Sometimes multiple AF points flash simultaneously.  
This indicates that focus has been achieved at all those AF points. As long as  
the AF point covering the desired subject flashes, you can take the picture.  
  The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation  
light <o> does not light.)  
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject.  
(The focus confirmation light <o> does not light.) You can shoot a  
moving subject in focus.  
  Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject.  
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (Manual Focus), set it  
to <AF> (Auto Focus).  
  Although it is daylight, the flash popped up.  
For a backlit subject, the flash may pop up to help lighten the subject’s  
dark areas.  
  In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.  
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to fire a  
series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called the AF-assist  
beam. It is effective up to approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet away.  
  Although flash was used, the picture came out dark.  
The subject was too far away. The subject should be within 5 meters/16.4  
feet from the camera.  
  When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out  
unnaturally dark.  
The subject was too close to the camera, and a shadow was created by the lens  
barrel. The subject should be at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away from the camera. If a  
hood has been attached to the lens, remove it before taking the flash picture.  
55  
1 Full Auto Techniques  
Recomposing the Shot  
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to  
create a balanced background and good perspective.  
In the <1> (Full Auto) mode, while you press the shutter button  
halfway to focus a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then  
recompose the shot and press the shutter button completely to take the  
picture. This is called “focus lock”. Focus lock is also possible in other  
Basic Zone modes (except <5> Sports).  
Shooting a Moving Subject  
In the <1> (Full Auto) mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera  
changes) during or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus  
the subject continuously. As long as you keep aiming the AF point on  
the subject while pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will  
be continuous. When you want to take the picture, press the shutter  
button completely.  
56  
1 Full Auto Techniques  
Live View Shooting  
By pressing the <A> button, you can shoot while viewing the image on  
the camera’s LCD monitor. This is called Live View shooting. For  
details, see page 151.  
Display the shooting image on  
the LCD monitor.  
  Press the <A> button.  
X The image will appear on the LCD  
monitor.  
1
Focus the subject.  
2
  Aim the center AF point < > on the  
subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway to  
focus.  
Take the picture.  
  Press the shutter button completely.  
3
X
The picture will be taken and the captured  
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.  
X After the image review ends, the  
camera will return to Live View  
shooting automatically.  
  Press the <A> button to exit Live  
View shooting.  
You can also rotate the LCD monitor in different directions (p.27).  
Normal angle  
Low angle  
High angle  
57  
7 Disabling Flash  
In places where flash photography is prohibited, use the <7> (Flash  
Off) mode. This mode is also effective for capturing the particular  
ambience of a scene, such as candlelight scenes.  
Shooting Tips  
  If the numeric display in the viewfinder blinks, take care to  
prevent camera shake.  
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the  
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady  
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to  
reduce blur caused by camera shake.  
  Taking portraits without flash.  
Under low light, the person must not move until the picture is taken.  
If the person moves during the exposure, he or she might look  
blurred in the picture.  
58  
C Creative Auto Shooting  
Unlike the <1> Full Auto mode where the camera sets everything, the  
<C> Creative Auto mode enables you to easily set the depth of field,  
drive mode, and flash firing.  
You can also choose the ambience you want to convey in your images.  
The default setting is the same as the <1> (Full Auto) mode.  
* CA stands for Creative Auto.  
Set the Mode Dial to <C>.  
1
Press the <Q> button.  
2
X The Quick Control screen will appear  
on the LCD monitor.  
Select a function.  
3
  Press the <V> key to select a  
function.  
X A brief description of the selected  
function is displayed on the screen’s  
bottom.  
  For details on setting each function,  
see pages 60-61.  
Take the picture.  
  Press the shutter button completely to  
4
take the picture.  
If you change the shooting mode or if you turn off the power, the Creative  
Auto settings will revert to the default. However, the self-timer and remote  
control settings will be retained.  
59  
C Creative Auto Shooting  
(1)  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
ISO speed  
(2)  
(3)  
Battery check  
Possible shots  
Image-recording quality  
Maximum burst  
(1) Shoot by ambience selection  
You can set the ambience you want to convey in your images. Press  
the <U> key to select the desired ambience. You can also turn  
the <5> or <6> dial to select the ambience. For details, see page  
68.  
(2) Blurring/sharpening the background  
If you move the index mark toward the left, the background will look  
more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the background will  
look more in focus. If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting  
Portraits” on page 62. Press the <U> key to set the desired effect.  
You can also turn the <5> or <6> dial.  
Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background  
might not look so blurred. This setting cannot be set (grayed out)  
while the built-in flash is popped up. If flash is used, this setting will  
not be applied.  
60  
C Creative Auto Shooting  
(3) Drive mode/Flash firing  
When you press <0>, the drive mode and flash firing setting  
screens will appear. Set as desired and press <0> to finalize the  
setting and return to the Quick Control screen.  
Drive mode: Turn the <6> dial to set it as desired.  
<i> (Low-speed continuous shooting): Shoot continuously at a  
maximum of approx. 3 frames per second (fps).  
<Q> (Self-timer: 10-sec./Remote control): When you press the  
shutter button, the picture will be taken after a 10-sec. delay.  
See the  
notes for “Using the Self-timer” on page 82.  
Remote control shooting is also possible (p.126).  
* You can also set the drive mode on the LCD panel while the Quick Control  
screen is not displayed. Look at the LCD panel, press the <R> button,  
and turn the <5> or <6> dial to set as desired.  
Flash firing: Press the <U> key to set it as desired.  
<a> (Auto flash), <D> (Flash on), or <b> (Flash off) can be  
selected.  
61  
2 Shooting Portraits  
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human  
subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and the hair look softer than  
with the <1> (Full Auto) mode.  
Shooting Tips  
  The farther the distance between the subject and background,  
the better.  
The further the distance between the subject and background, the  
more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand  
out better in front of a plain, dark background.  
  Use a telephoto lens.  
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with  
the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.  
  Focus the face.  
Check that the AF point covering the face flashes in red.  
  If you hold down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously to obtain  
different poses and facial expressions. (max. approx. 3 shots/sec.)  
  If necessary, the built-in flash will pop up automatically.  
62  
3 Shooting Landscapes  
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery, night scenes, or to  
have everything in focus from near to far. The greens and blues also  
become more vivid and sharper than with <1> (Full Auto).  
Shooting Tips  
  With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.  
When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far  
will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth  
to landscapes.  
  Shooting night scenes.  
Since the built-in flash will be disabled, this  
mode <3> is also good for night scenes.  
Use a tripod to prevent camera shake. If  
you want to photograph a person against a  
night scene, set the Mode Dial to <6>  
(Night Portrait) and use a tripod (p.66).  
63  
4 Shooting Close-ups  
When you want to photograph flowers or small things up close, use the  
<4> (Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a  
macro lens (sold separately).  
Shooting Tips  
  Use a simple background.  
A simple background makes the flower, etc., stand out better.  
  Move to the subject as close as possible.  
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses  
have indications such as <40.45m/1.5ft>. The lens minimum  
focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on  
the camera to the subject. If you are too close to the subject, the  
focus confirmation light <o> will blink.  
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire. If you are too close to the  
subject and the bottom of the picture looks dark, move away from  
the subject.  
  With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.  
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the  
subject look larger.  
64  
5 Shooting Moving Subjects  
To photograph a moving subject, whether it is a child running or a  
moving vehicle, use the <5> (Sports) mode.  
Shooting Tips  
  Use a telephoto lens.  
Using a telephoto lens is recommended so you can shoot from afar.  
  Use the center AF point to focus.  
Aim the center AF point over the subject, then press the shutter  
button halfway to auto focus. During autofocusing, the beeper will  
continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved, the focus  
confirmation light <o> will blink.  
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button  
completely. If you hold down the shutter button, continuous shooting  
(max. approx. 5.3 shots per sec.) and autofocusing will take effect.  
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder’s  
shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady  
and shoot.  
65  
6 Shooting Portraits at Night  
To shoot someone at night and obtain a natural-looking exposure in the  
background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode.  
Shooting Tips  
  Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.  
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide  
night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.  
  Keep the person within 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.  
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a  
good exposure of the person. The effective distance of the built-in  
flash is 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera.  
  Shoot also with <1> (Full Auto).  
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also  
with <1> (Full Auto) is recommended.  
  Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.  
  If the self-timer is also used, the self-timer lamp will light briefly when the  
picture is taken.  
66  
Q Quick Control Screen  
In Basic Zone modes, you can press the <Q> button to display the  
Quick Control screen. The table below indicates the functions that can  
be set with the Quick Control screen in each Basic Zone mode. For the  
setting procedure, see page 44.  
Settable Functions on the Quick Control Screen in Basic Zone Modes  
o: Automatically set k: User selectable  
: Not selectable  
1
7
C
2
3
4
5
6
Function  
(p.54) (p.58) (p.59) (p.62) (p.63) (p.64) (p.65) (p.66)  
Single shooting  
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
Low-speed  
k
Continuous  
shooting  
Drive  
High-speed  
k
k
Self-timer: 10 sec./Remote control  
Automatic firing  
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
o
Flash firing  
Flash on  
Flash off  
o
k
k
o
k
k
Shoot by ambience selection (p.68)  
Shoot by lighting or scene type (p.71)  
Blurring/sharpening the background (p.60)  
k
k
k
k
k
k
67  
Shoot by Ambience Selection  
Except in the <1> (Full Auto) and <7> (Flash Off) Basic Zone  
modes, you can select the ambience for shooting.  
Ambience  
(1) Standard setting  
(2) Vivid  
1
7
C
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
2
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
3
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
6
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Ambience Effect  
No setting  
Low / Standard / Strong  
Low / Standard / Strong  
Low / Standard / Strong  
Low / Standard / Strong  
Low / Standard / Strong  
Low / Medium / High  
Low / Medium / High  
Blue / B/W / Sepia  
(3) Soft  
(4) Warm  
(5) Intense  
(6) Cool  
(7) Brighter  
(8) Darker  
(9) Monochrome  
Set the Mode Dial to any of the  
following modes: <C> <2>  
<3> <4> <5> <6>  
1
Display the Live View image.  
  Press the <A> button to switch to  
2
Live View shooting.  
On the Quick Control screen,  
3 select the desired ambience.  
  Press the <Q> button (7).  
  Press the <V> key to select  
[Standard setting]. [Shoot by  
ambience selection] will appear on  
the screen’s bottom.  
  Press the <U> key to select the  
desired ambience.  
X
The LCD monitor will show how the image  
will look with the selected ambience.  
68  
Shoot by Ambience Selection  
Set the ambience effect.  
4
5
  Press the <V> key to select the  
effect bar so that [Effect] appears on  
the bottom.  
  Press the <U> key to select the  
desired effect.  
Take the picture.  
  To shoot while the Live View image is  
displayed, press the shutter button.  
  To return to the viewfinder shooting,  
press the <A> button to exit Live  
View shooting. Then press the shutter  
button completely to take the picture.  
  Setting the power switch to <2> or  
changing the shooting mode will  
revert the setting to [Standard  
setting].  
  The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not  
exactly match the actual photo you take.  
  Using flash may minimize the ambience effect.  
  In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the screen might not  
exactly match the brightness or ambience in the actual photo you take.  
Set the [6 LCD brightness] menu to 4 and look at the Live View image  
while the screen is unaffected by outside light.  
If you don’t want the Live View image to be displayed when setting  
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1. When pressing the <Q>  
button, the Quick Control screen is displayed and you can shoot with the  
viewfinder after setting [Shoot by ambience selection] and [Shoot by  
lighting or scene].  
69  
Shoot by Ambience Selection  
Ambience Settings  
(1) Standard setting  
Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.  
Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and  
<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of  
the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.  
(2) Vivid  
The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more  
impressive than with [Standard setting].  
(3) Soft  
The subject will look softer and more dainty. Geared for portraits,  
pets, flowers, etc.  
(4) Warm  
The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Geared for portraits,  
pets, and other subjects you want give a warm look.  
(5) Intense  
While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is  
emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living  
subject stand out more.  
(6) Cool  
The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A  
subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.  
(7) Brighter  
The picture will look brighter.  
(8) Darker  
The picture will look darker.  
(9) Monochrome  
The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome  
color to be black and white, sepia, or blue.  
70  
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type  
In the <2> (Portrait), <3> (Landscape), <4> (Close-up), and <5>  
(Sports) Basic Zone modes, you can shoot while the settings match the  
lighting or scene type. Normally, [Default setting] is adequate, but if the  
settings match the lighting condition or scene, the picture will look more  
accurate to your eye.  
If you use this setting together with [Shoot by ambience selection]  
(p.68), you should set this first for better results.  
Lighting or Scene  
(1) Default setting  
(2) Daylight  
1
7
C
2
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
3
k
k
k
k
4
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
6
(3) Shade  
(4) Cloudy  
(5) Tungsten light  
(6) Fluorescent light  
(7) Sunset  
k
Set the Mode Dial to any of the  
following modes: <2> <3>  
<4> <5>  
1
Display the Live View image.  
  Press the <A> button to switch to  
2
Live View shooting.  
71  
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type  
On the Quick Control screen,  
3 select the lighting or scene type.  
  Press the <Q> button (7).  
  Press the <V> key to select  
[Default setting]. [Shoot by lighting  
or scene type] will appear on the  
screen’s bottom.  
  Press the <U> key to select the  
lighting or scene type.  
X The LCD monitor will show how the  
image will look with the selected  
lighting or scene type.  
Take the picture.  
  To shoot while the Live View image is  
4
displayed, press the shutter button.  
  To return to the viewfinder shooting,  
press the <A> button to exit Live  
View shooting. Then press the shutter  
button completely to take the picture.  
  Setting the power switch to <2> or  
changing the shooting mode will  
revert the setting to [Default setting].  
  If you use flash, [Default setting] will take effect.  
  If you want to set this together with [Shoot by ambience selection], set  
the [Shoot by lighting or scene type] which best matches the  
ambience you have set. In the case of [Sunset] for example, warm  
colors will become prominent so the ambience you set might not work  
well. Before taking the picture, first check the Live View image to see  
how the picture will look.  
72  
Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type  
Lighting or Scene Type Settings  
(1) Default setting  
The default setting.  
(2) Daylight  
For subjects under sunlight. Produces more natural-looking blue  
skies and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.  
(3) Shade  
For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones which may look too  
bluish or light-colored flowers.  
(4) Cloudy  
For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and  
landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look  
warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.  
(5) Tungsten light  
For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange  
color cast caused by tungsten lighting.  
(6) Fluorescent light  
For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of  
fluorescent lighting.  
(7) Sunset  
Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.  
73  
3
Setting the AF and  
Drive Modes  
The viewfinder has nine AF points.  
By manually selecting a suitable AF  
point, you can shoot with autofocus  
while composing the shot as  
desired.  
You can also select the AF mode and drive mode best  
matching the shooting conditions and subject.  
  The M icon on the upper right of the page title indicates  
that the function can be used only in Creative Zone modes  
(d/ s/ f/ a/ F).  
  In Basic Zone modes, the AF mode, AF point, and drive  
mode are set automatically.  
<AF> stands for auto focus. <MF> stands for manual focus.  
75  
f: Selecting the AF ModeN  
You can select the AF mode suiting the shooting conditions or subject.  
In Basic Zone modes, the most suitable AF mode is set automatically.  
On the lens, set the focus mode  
switch to <AF>.  
1
Set the Mode Dial to a Creative  
2 Zone mode.  
Press the <f> button. (9)  
3
Select the AF mode.  
4
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <6> or <5> dial.  
X: One-Shot AF  
9: AI Focus AF  
Z: AI Servo AF  
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects  
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button  
halfway, the camera will focus only once.  
  When focus is achieved, the AF point which achieved focus will flash  
briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder  
will also light.  
  With evaluative metering, the exposure setting will be set at the  
same time focus is achieved.  
  While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be  
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.  
76  
f: Selecting the AF ModeN  
  If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the  
viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, a picture cannot be taken even if the  
shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and try to  
focus again. Or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.80).  
  If the [1 Beep] menu is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when  
focus is achieved.  
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects  
This AF mode is for moving subjects when the focusing distance  
keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway,  
the subject will be focused continuously.  
  The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.  
  When the AF point selection (p.78) is automatic, the camera first  
uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing, if the subject  
moves away from the center AF point, focus tracking continues as  
long as the subject is covered by another AF point.  
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.  
Also, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light.  
AI Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Mode  
AI Focus AF switches the AF mode from One-Shot AF to AI Servo  
AF automatically if the still subject starts moving.  
  After the subject is focused in the One-Shot AF mode, if the subject  
starts moving, the camera will detect the movement and change the  
AF mode automatically to AI Servo AF.  
When focus is achieved in the AI Focus AF mode with the Servo mode  
active, the beeper will sound softly. However, the focus confirmation light  
<o> in the viewfinder will not light.  
77  
S Selecting the AF Point N  
Select one of the nine AF points to autofocus. Note that in Basic Zone  
modes, you cannot select the AF point since it is selected automatically.  
Press the <S> button. (9)  
1
X The selected AF point will be  
displayed in the viewfinder and on the  
LCD panel.  
  When all AF points light up in the  
viewfinder, automatic AF point  
selection will be set.  
Select the AF point.  
2
  Pressing <0> toggles the AF point  
selection between the center AF point  
and automatic AF point selection.  
Selecting with the Dial  
  When you turn the <6> or <5>  
dial, the AF point selection will  
change in the respective direction.  
  When all AF points light up, automatic  
AF point selection will be set.  
Selecting with the Multi-controller  
  The AF point selection will change in  
the direction you tilt the <9>. If you  
keep tilting <9> in the same  
direction, it will toggle between  
manual and automatic AF point  
selection.  
  Press <0> to select the center AF  
point.  
78  
S Selecting the AF Point N  
  If you prefer to look at the LCD panel while selecting the AF point, see  
the illustration below.  
Automatic selection  
right , top  
, center  
,
  When using an EOS-dedicated external Speedlite, if focus cannot be  
achieved with the AF-assist beam, select the center AF point.  
AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash  
Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,  
the built-in flash fires a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the subject to  
enable easier autofocusing.  
  The AF-assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes:  
<7> <3> <5>.  
  The built-in flash’s AF-assist beam is effective up to approx. 4 meters/  
13.1 feet.  
  In Creative Zone modes when you pop-up the built-in flash with the <I>  
button, the AF-assist beam will be fired when necessary.  
Lens’ Maximum Aperture and AF Sensitivity  
Maximum aperture: Up to f/5.6  
With all AF points, cross-type AF sensitive to both vertical and  
horizontal lines is possible.  
Maximum aperture: Up to f/2.8*  
With the center AF point, high-precision, cross-type AF sensitive to both  
vertical and horizontal lines is possible. The center AF point’s sensitivity  
to vertical and horizontal lines is about twice as sensitive as the other  
AF points.  
The remaining eight AF points will work as cross-type points with f/5.6  
and faster lenses.  
* Except with the EF 28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and EF 50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro lenses.  
79  
When Autofocus Fails  
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (the focus confirmation light <o>  
blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:  
Subjects difficult to focus  
  Very low-contrast subjects  
(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)  
  Subjects in very low light  
  Extremely backlit or reflective subjects  
(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)  
  Near and far subjects covered by an AF point  
(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)  
  Repetitive patterns  
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)  
In such cases, do one of the following:  
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the  
subject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.56).  
(2) Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.  
MF: Manual Focusing  
Set the lens focus mode switch to  
<MF>.  
X <4 L> will be displayed on the  
1
LCD panel.  
Focus the subject.  
2
Focusing ring  
  Focus by turning the lens focusing  
ring until the subject looks sharp in  
the viewfinder.  
If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF point  
which achieved focus will flash briefly in red and the focus confirmation light  
<o> will light in the viewfinder.  
80  
i Selecting the Drive ModeN  
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. In the <1> (Full  
Auto) mode, single shooting is set automatically.  
Press the <R> button. (9)  
1
Select the drive mode.  
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
2
the <6> or <5> dial.  
u : Single shooting  
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will  
be taken.  
o: High-speed continuous shooting (Max. approx. 5.3 shots/sec.)  
i : Low-speed continuous shooting (Max. approx. 3 shots/sec.)  
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be  
taken continuously.  
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control  
k: 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control  
For self-timer shooting, see the next page. For remote control  
shooting, see page 126.  
  In AI Servo AF mode, the continuous shooting speed may become  
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.  
  In low-light areas or indoors, the continuous shooting speed may  
become slower even if a fast shutter speed is set.  
81  
j Using the Self-timer  
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture. The <Q> (10  
sec. timer) can be used in all shooting modes.  
Press the <R> button. (9)  
1
Select the self-timer.  
2
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <6> dial to select the self-timer.  
Q : 10-sec. self-timer  
k: 2-sec. self-timerN  
Take the picture.  
  Look through the viewfinder, focus  
3
the subject, then press the shutter  
button completely.  
X You can check the self-timer  
operation with the self-timer lamp,  
beeper, and countdown display (in  
seconds) on the LCD panel.  
X Two seconds before the picture is  
taken, the self-timer lamp will stay on  
and the beeper will sound faster.  
  The <k> 2-sec. self-timer enables you to shoot while not touching the  
camera mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake while you  
shoot still lifes or bulb exposures.  
  After taking self-timer shots, you should check the image for proper focus  
and exposure (p.190).  
  If you will not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter  
button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.124). If stray light enters the  
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.  
  When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.56) on  
an object at about the same distance as where you will stand.  
  To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the <R> button.  
82  
4
Image Settings  
This chapter explains image-related function settings:  
Image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, white  
balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, lens peripheral  
illumination correction, etc.  
  In Basic Zone modes, only the following can be set as  
described in this chapter: Image-recording quality, lens  
peripheral illumination correction, folder creation and  
selection, and image file numbering.  
  The M icon on the upper right of the page title indicates  
that the function can be used only in Creative Zone modes  
(d/ s/ f/ a/ F).  
83  
3 Setting the Image-recording Quality  
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are eight  
JPEG image quality settings: 73/83/74/84/7a/8a/b/c.  
There are three RAW image quality settings: 1, 41, 61 (p.86)  
Select [Quality].  
  Under the [1] tab, select [Quality],  
1
then press <0>.  
Select the image-recording quality.  
2
  To select a RAW setting, turn the  
<6> dial. To select a JPEG setting,  
press the <U> key.  
  On the upper right, the “***M  
(megapixels) **** x ****” number  
indicates the recorded pixel count,  
and [***] is the number of possible  
shots (displayed up to 999).  
  Press <0> to set it.  
Image-recording Quality Setting Examples  
73 only  
1 only  
1+73  
61+74  
* If [–] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.  
84  
3 Setting the Image-recording Quality  
Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings (Approx.)  
Pixels Recorded Printing  
File Size  
(MB)  
Possible Maximum  
Quality  
(megapixels)  
Size  
Shots  
Burst  
73  
83  
74  
84  
6.4  
3.2  
3.4  
1.7  
2.2  
1.1  
490  
58  
Approx. 17.9  
(17.9M)  
A2 or larger  
990  
320  
940  
270  
Approx. 8.0  
(8M)  
Around A3  
Around A4  
1930  
1500  
3100  
1930  
1500  
3100  
7a  
JPEG  
Approx. 4.5  
(4.5M)  
8a  
Approx. 2.5  
(2.5M)  
Around  
9x13cm  
*1  
b
1.3  
0.3  
2580  
10780  
130  
2580  
10780  
16  
Approx. 0.35  
(0.35M)  
*2  
c
Approx. 17.9  
(17.9M)  
1
A2 or larger  
Around A3  
Around A4  
24.5  
Approx. 10.1  
(10M)  
RAW 41  
16.7  
190  
19  
Approx. 4.5  
(4.5M)  
61  
11.1  
300  
24  
1
73  
Approx. 17.9  
Approx. 17.9  
A2 or larger  
A2 or larger  
24.5+6.4  
16.7+6.4  
11.1+6.4  
100  
7
RAW  
41  
+
Approx. 10.1  
Approx. 17.9  
Around A3  
A2 or larger  
140  
7
73  
JPEG  
61  
73  
Approx. 4.5  
Approx. 17.9  
Around A4  
A2 or larger  
180  
8
*1: b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame.  
*2: c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web site.  
  b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.  
  Figures for the file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous  
shooting are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100  
and Standard Picture Style) using a 4GB card. These figures will vary  
depending on the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture  
Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.  
  The maximum burst applies to <o> high-speed continuous shooting.  
85  
3 Setting the Image-recording Quality  
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio,  
the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print. If  
the image is cropped, it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer  
number of pixels.  
  If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded  
simultaneously to the card in both file types at the selected image-  
recording quality. The two images will be saved in the same folder with  
the same file numbers (file extension .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW).  
  The image-recording quality settings are named as follows: 1 (RAW),  
41 (Medium RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG, 7 (Fine), 8  
(Normal), 3 (Large), 4 (Medium), 6 (Small).  
About RAW  
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to  
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the  
quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.  
A 1 image can be processed with the [3 RAW image processing]  
menu (p.224) and saved as a JPEG image. (41 and 61 images  
cannot be processed with the camera.) While the RAW image itself  
does not change, you can process the RAW image according to  
different conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.  
With all RAW images, you can use the provided software to make  
various adjustments and then generate a JPEG, TIFF, etc., image  
incorporating those adjustments.  
Commercially-available software might not be able to display RAW images.  
Using the provided software is recommended.  
86  
3 Setting the Image-recording Quality  
Maximum Burst During Continuous Shooting  
The maximum burst during continuous shooting indicated on page 85 is  
the number of continuous shots that can be taken without stopping,  
based on a formatted 4GB card.  
The number is displayed on the bottom  
right in the viewfinder. If the maximum  
burst is 99 or higher, “99” will be  
displayed.  
  The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the  
camera. Make sure that a card is loaded before taking a picture.  
  If [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction] is set to [2: Strong],  
the maximum burst will be greatly reduced (p.254).  
If the viewfinder displays “99” for the maximum burst, it means the maximum  
burst is 99 or higher. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower and the  
internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.  
If you stop the continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After  
all the captured images are written to the card, the maximum burst will be as  
listed on page 85.  
87  
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN  
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the  
ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set  
automatically (p.89).  
Press the <i> button. (9)  
1
Set the ISO speed.  
2
  While looking at the LCD panel or  
viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>  
dial.  
  It can be set within ISO 100-6400 in  
1/3-stop increments.  
  With “A” selected, the ISO speed will  
be set automatically (p.89).  
ISO Speed Guide  
Shooting Situation  
ISO Speed  
Flash Range  
(No flash)  
100 - 400  
400 - 1600  
Sunny outdoors  
The higher the ISO speed,  
Overcast skies or evening time the farther the flash range  
will extend (p.131).  
Dark indoors or night  
1600 - 6400, H  
* High ISO speeds will result in grainy images.  
  If [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], ISO 100/  
125/160 and “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) cannot be set (p.255).  
  Shooting in high temperatures may result in grainy pictures. Long  
exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.  
  When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (banding, dots of light, etc.)  
may become noticeable.  
With [8C.Fn I -3: ISO expansion] set to [1: On], “H” (equivalent to ISO  
12800) can also be set (p.252).  
88  
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN  
About “A” (Auto) ISO Speed  
If the ISO speed is set to “A”, the actual  
ISO speed to be set will be displayed  
when you press the shutter button  
halfway. As indicated below, the ISO  
speed will be set automatically to suit the  
shooting mode.  
Shooting Mode  
ISO Speed Setting  
1/7/C/3/4/5/6  
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 3200  
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 6400*1  
Fixed at ISO 100  
d/s/f/a  
2
F
Fixed at ISO 400  
Fixed at ISO 400*2*3  
With flash  
*1: Depending on the maximum ISO speed that has been set.  
*2: If fill flash results in overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO will be set.  
*3: In the <d> and Basic Zone modes (except <6>), ISO 400 - 1600 will be set  
automatically if bounce flash is used with an external Speedlite. If the  
maximum ISO speed has been set to [400] or [800], the ISO speed will be set  
within this limit.  
3 Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for Auto ISON  
For Auto ISO, you can set the maximum ISO speed within ISO 400 -  
6400. If you want better image quality with less noise, set the maximum  
ISO speed to 400, 800, or 1600. If you will shoot in low light and want to  
avoid using a slow shutter speed, set the maximum ISO speed to 3200  
or 6400.  
Under the [y] tab, select [ISO Auto],  
then press <0>. Select the ISO speed,  
then press <0>.  
89  
A Selecting a Picture StyleN  
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image effects matching  
your photographic expression or the subject.  
In Basic Zone modes, you cannot select the Picture Style.  
Select [Picture Style].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [Picture  
Style], then press <0>.  
X The Picture Style selection screen will  
appear.  
Select a Picture Style.  
2
  Select a Picture Style, then press  
<0>.  
X The Picture Style will be set and the  
menu reappears.  
Picture Style Effects  
P Standard  
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose  
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.  
Q Portrait  
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Effective for close-  
ups of people. This Picture Style is also selected automatically  
when the Mode Dial is set to <2>.  
By changing the [Color tone] (p.92), you can adjust the skin tone.  
R Landscape  
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.  
Effective for impressive landscapes. This Picture Style is also  
selected automatically when the Mode Dial is set to <3>.  
90  
A Selecting a Picture StyleN  
S Neutral  
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with  
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.  
U Faithful  
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with  
their computer. When the subject is captured under a daylight  
color temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically  
to match the subject’s color. The image is dull and subdued.  
V Monochrome  
Creates black-and-white images.  
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be reverted to color. If  
you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the  
[Monochrome] setting has been canceled. When [Monochrome] is  
selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
W User Def. 1-3  
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a  
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.94). Any User  
Defined Picture Style which has not been set will have the same  
settings as the Standard Picture Style.  
About the Symbols  
The symbols on the upper right of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters  
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. The numerals indicate the parameter  
settings, such as for [Sharpness] and [Contrast], for each Picture Style.  
Symbols  
g
h
i
j
k
l
Sharpness  
Contrast  
Saturation  
Color tone  
Filter effect (Monochrome)  
Toning effect (Monochrome)  
91  
A Customizing a Picture StyleN  
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters  
like [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take test  
shots. To customize [Monochrome], see the next page.  
Select [Picture Style].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [Picture  
Style], then press <0>.  
X The Picture Style selection screen will  
appear.  
Select a Picture Style.  
2
  Select a Picture Style, then press the  
<B> button.  
Select a parameter.  
3
  Select a parameter such as  
[Sharpness], then press <0>.  
Set the parameter.  
4
  Press the <U> key to adjust the  
parameter as desired, then press  
<0>.  
  Press the <M> button to save the  
adjusted parameters. The Picture  
Style selection screen will reappear.  
X Any settings different from the default  
will be displayed in blue.  
Parameter Settings and Effects  
g Sharpness  
h Contrast  
0: Less sharp outline  
-4: Low contrast  
+7: Sharp outline  
+4: High contrast  
i Saturation  
j Color tone  
-4: Low saturation  
-4: Reddish skin tone  
+4: High saturation  
+4: Yellowish skin tone  
92  
A Customizing a Picture StyleN  
  By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective  
Picture Style to its default parameter settings.  
  To shoot with the Picture Style you modified, follow step 2 on the  
preceding page to select the modified Picture Style and then shoot.  
Monochrome Adjustment  
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in  
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding  
page.  
kFilter Effect  
With a filter effect applied to a  
monochrome image, you can make  
white clouds or green trees stand out  
more.  
Filter  
N: None  
Sample Effects  
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.  
Ye: Yellow  
Or: Orange  
R: Red  
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look crisper.  
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.  
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.  
Skin tones and lips will look fine. Tree leaves will look crisper and brighter.  
G: Green  
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.  
lToning Effect  
By applying a toning effect, you can  
create a monochrome image in that  
color. It can make the image look more  
impressive.  
The following can be selected: [N:None]  
[S:Sepia] [B:Blue] [P:Purple]  
[G:Green].  
93  
A Registering a Picture StyleN  
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],  
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],  
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].  
You can create Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as for  
sharpness and contrast are different. You can also adjust the  
parameters of a Picture Style which has been registered to the camera  
with the provided software.  
Select [Picture Style].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [Picture  
Style], then press <0>.  
X The Picture Style selection screen will  
appear.  
Select [User Def.].  
2
  Select [User Def. *], then press the  
<B> button.  
Press <0>.  
  With [Picture Style] selected, press  
3
<0>.  
Select the base Picture Style.  
4
  Press the <V> key to select the  
base Picture Style, then press <0>.  
  To adjust the parameters of a Picture  
Style which has been registered to  
the camera with the provided  
software, select the Picture Style  
here.  
94  
A Registering a Picture StyleN  
Select a parameter.  
  Select a parameter such as  
5
[Sharpness], then press <0>.  
Set the parameter.  
6
  Press the <U> key to adjust the  
parameter as desired, then press  
<0>. For details, see “Customizing  
a Picture Style” on pages 92-93.  
  Press the <M> button to register  
the new Picture Style. The Picture  
Style selection screen will then  
reappear.  
X The base Picture Style will be  
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].  
X The name of the Picture Style having  
any modified settings (different from  
the default) registered under [User  
Def. *] will be displayed in blue.  
  If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],  
changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will cancel the parameter  
settings of the registered Picture Style.  
  If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.51), all the [User Def. *]  
settings will revert to the default.  
To shoot with the registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on the preceding  
page to select [User Def. *] and then shoot.  
95  
3 Setting the White BalanceN  
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,  
the <Q> (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-  
looking colors cannot be obtained with <Q>, you can select the white  
balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white  
object.  
Select [White balance].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [White  
balance], then press <0>.  
Select the white balance.  
2
  Select the white balance, then press  
<0>.  
Display  
Q
W
Mode  
Color Temperature (Approx. K: Kelvin)  
Auto  
3000 - 7000  
5200  
Daylight  
Shade  
E
R
Y
7000  
Cloudy, twilight, sunset  
Tungsten light  
6000  
3200  
U
White fluorescent light  
Flash use  
4000  
I
Automatically set*  
2000 - 10000  
2500 - 10000  
O
P
Custom (p.97)  
Color temperature (p.98)  
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.  
Otherwise, it will be set to approx. 6000K.  
About White Balance  
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of  
lighting. With a digital camera, the color temperature is adjusted with  
software to make the white areas look white. This adjustment serves as  
the basis for the color correction. The result is natural-looking colors in  
the pictures.  
96  
3 Setting the White BalanceN  
O Custom White Balance  
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance  
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Do this procedure under  
the actual light source to be used.  
Photograph a white object.  
1
  The plain, white object should fill the  
spot metering circle.  
  Focus manually and set the standard  
exposure for the white object.  
  You can set any white balance.  
Spot metering circle  
Select [Custom White Balance].  
2
  Under the [2] tab, select [Custom  
White Balance], then press <0>.  
X The custom white balance selection  
screen will appear.  
Import the white balance data.  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image captured in step 1, then press  
<0>.  
X On the dialog screen which appears,  
select [OK] and the data will be  
imported.  
  When the menu reappears, press the  
<M> button to exit the menu.  
Select [White balance].  
4
  Under the [2] tab, select [White  
balance], then press <0>.  
Select the custom white balance.  
  Select [O], then press <0>.  
5
97  
3 Setting the White BalanceN  
  If the exposure obtained in step 1 is way off, a correct white balance  
might not be obtained.  
  If the image was captured while the Picture Style was set to  
[Monochrome] (p.91) or if a Creative filter has been applied to the image  
(p.220), it cannot be selected in step 3.  
  Instead of a white object, an 18% gray card (commercially available) can  
produce a more accurate white balance.  
  The personal white balance registered with the provided software will be  
registered under [O]. If you do step 3, the data for the registered  
personal white balance will be erased.  
P Setting the Color Temperature  
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically in Kelvin.  
This is for advanced users.  
Select [White balance].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [White  
balance], then press <0>.  
Set the color temperature.  
  Select [P].  
  Turn the <6> dial to set the color  
temperature, then press <0>.  
  The color temperature can be set  
from approx. 2500K to 10000K in  
100K increments.  
2
  When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white  
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.  
  If you want to set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available  
color temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to  
compensate for the difference between the color temperature meter’s  
reading and the camera’s color temperature reading.  
98  
u White Balance CorrectionN  
You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment  
will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color  
temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color  
can be corrected to one of nine levels.  
This is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature  
conversion or color compensating filters.  
White Balance Correction  
Select [WB Shift/BKT].  
  Under the [2] tab, select [WB Shift/  
1
BKT], then press <0>.  
Set the white balance correction.  
2
  Use <9> to move the “ ” mark to the  
desired position.  
  B is for blue, A is amber, M is  
magenta, and G is green. The color in  
the respective direction will be  
Sample setting: A2, G1  
corrected.  
  On the upper right, “Shift” indicates  
the direction and correction amount.  
  Pressing the <B> button will  
cancel all the [WB Shift/BKT]  
settings.  
  Press <0> to exit the setting and  
return to the menu.  
  During the white balance correction, <u> will be displayed in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
  One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to 5 mireds of a color  
temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating the  
density of a color temperature conversion filter.)  
99  
u White Balance CorrectionN  
White Balance Auto Bracketing  
With just one shot, three images having a different color balance can be  
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white  
balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or  
magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White  
balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.  
Set the white balance bracketing  
amount.  
 
In step 2 for white balance correction, when  
you turn the < > dial, the “ ” mark on the  
screen will change to “ ” (3 points).  
5
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/A  
bracketing, and turning it to the left sets the  
M/G bracketing.  
B/A bias ±3 levels  
X
On the right, “Bracket” indicates the  
bracketing direction and correction amount.  
  Pressing the <B> button will  
cancel all the [WB Shift/BKT]  
settings.  
  Press <0> to exit the setting and  
return to the menu.  
Bracketing Sequence  
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard  
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard  
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.  
 
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be  
lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to one-third the  
normal number.  
  You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white  
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance  
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.  
 
Since three images are recorded for one shot, the card will take longer to record the shot.  
  BKT” stands for Bracketing.  
100  
3Auto Lighting OptimizerN  
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and  
contrast can be corrected automatically. The default setting is [Standard].  
With JPEG images, the correction is done when the image is captured.  
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].  
  Under the [2] tab, select [Auto  
1
Lighting Optimizer], then press  
<0>.  
Set the correction setting.  
2
  Select the desired setting, then press  
<0>.  
Take the picture.  
  The image will be recorded with the  
3
brightness and contrast corrected if  
necessary.  
Without correction  
With correction  
  If [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], the Auto  
Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable] and you cannot  
change this setting.  
  Depending on the shooting conditions, noise might increase.  
  If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure  
compensation, flash exposure compensation, or manual exposure to  
darken the exposure, the image might still come out bright. If you want a  
darker exposure, set this to [Disable] first.  
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.  
101  
3
Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction  
Due to the lens characteristics, the four corners of the picture might look  
darker. This is called lens light fall-off or drop in peripheral illumination.  
The default setting is [Enable].  
Select [Peripheral illumin.  
correct.].  
  Under the [1] tab, select  
[Peripheral illumin. correct.], then  
press <0>.  
1
Set the correction setting.  
2
  On the screen, check that the  
attached lens’ [Correction data  
available] is displayed.  
  If [Correction data not available] is  
displayed, see “About the Lens  
Correction Data” on the next page.  
  Select [Enable], then press <0>.  
Take the picture.  
  The image will be recorded with the  
3
corrected peripheral illumination.  
Without correction  
With correction  
102  
3Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction  
About the Lens Correction Data  
The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction  
data for about 25 lenses. In step 2, if you select [Enable], the peripheral  
light correction will be applied automatically for any lens whose  
correction data has been registered in the camera.  
With EOS Utility (provided software), you can check which lenses have  
their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the  
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, see the PDF  
Software Instruction Manual (on the CD-ROM) for EOS Utility.  
  For JPEG images already captured, lens peripheral illumination  
correction cannot be applied.  
  Depending on shooting conditions, noise might appear on the image  
periphery.  
  When using a non-Canon lens, setting the correction to [Disable] is  
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.  
  Lens peripheral light correction is applied even when an Extender is  
attached.  
 
If the correction data for the attached lens has not been registered to the  
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to  
[Disable].  
  The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum  
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided  
software).  
  If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will  
be lower.  
  The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.  
103  
3Creating and Selecting a Folder  
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images  
are to be saved.  
This is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving  
captured images.  
Create a Folder  
Select [Select folder].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [Select  
folder], then press <0>.  
Select [Create folder].  
2
  Select [Create folder], then press  
<0>.  
Create a new folder.  
3
  Select [OK], then press <0>.  
X A new folder with a higher one-up  
folder number is created.  
104  
3Creating and Selecting a Folder  
Selecting a Folder  
  With the folder selection screen  
displayed, select a folder and press  
<0>.  
Lowest file number  
Number of images  
in folder  
X The folder where the captured  
images will be saved is selected.  
  Subsequent captured images will be  
recorded into the selected folder.  
Folder name  
Highest file number  
About Folders  
As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits  
(folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can contain  
up to 9999 images (file No. 0001 - 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new  
folder with a higher one-up folder number is created automatically. Also, if  
manual reset (p.107) is executed, a new folder will be created automatically.  
Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.  
Creating Folders with a Personal Computer  
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open  
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and  
organize your images. The folder name must follow the “100ABC_D” format  
where the first three digits is 100 - 999 followed by five alphanumeric  
characters. The five characters can be a combination of upper- or lower-case  
letters from A to Z, numerals, and an underscore “_”. There can be no space in  
the folder name. Also, folder names cannot have the same three-digit number  
such as “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ” even if the letters are different.  
105  
3File Numbering Methods  
The file number is like the frame number on a roll of film. The captured  
images are assigned a sequential file number from 0001 to 9999 and  
saved in one folder. You can change how the file number is assigned.  
The file number will appear on your computer in this format:  
IMG_0001.JPG.  
Select [File numbering].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [File  
numbering], then press <0>.  
Select the file numbering method.  
2
  Select the desired setting, then press  
<0>.  
Continuous  
Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is  
replaced or a new folder is created.  
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file  
numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient when  
you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 in  
multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal computer.  
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images  
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might  
continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or  
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, you should use a  
newly-formatted card each time.  
File numbering after  
replacing the card  
File numbering after  
creating a folder  
Card-1  
Card-1  
Card-2  
100  
XXX-0051  
101  
XXX-0052  
XXX-0051  
XXX-0052  
Next sequential file number  
106  
3File Numbering Methods  
Auto Reset  
The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time the card is  
replaced or a new folder is created.  
Whenever the card is replaced or a new folder created, the file  
numbering starts from 0001. This is convenient if you want to organize  
images according to cards or folders. If the replacement card or existing  
folder already contains images recorded previously, the file numbering  
of the new images might continue from the file numbering of the existing  
images in the card or folder. If you want to save images with the file  
numbering starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.  
File numbering after  
replacing the card  
File numbering after  
creating a folder  
Card-1  
Card-1  
Card-2  
100  
XXX-0051  
101  
XXX-0001  
XXX-0051  
100-0001  
File numbering is reset  
Manual Reset  
To reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number  
0001 in a new folder.  
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created  
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts  
from 0001. This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the  
images taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the  
manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.  
If the file number in folder No. 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be  
possible even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will  
display a message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.  
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie  
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG  
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “. MOV” for movies.  
107  
3Setting Copyright InformationN  
When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the  
image as Exif information.  
Select [Copyright information].  
1
  Under the [7] tab, select [Copyright  
information], then press <0>.  
Select the desired option.  
2
  Select [Enter author’s name] or  
[Enter copyright details], then press  
<0>.  
X The text entry screen will appear.  
  Select [Display copyright info.] to  
check the copyright information  
currently set.  
  Select [Delete copyright  
information] to delete the copyright  
information currently set.  
Enter text.  
  Refer to “Text Entry Procedure” on  
3
the next page and enter the copyright  
information.  
  Enter up to 63 alphanumeric  
characters and symbols.  
Exit the setting.  
4
  After entering the text, press the  
<M> button to exit.  
108  
3Setting Copyright InformationN  
Text Entry Procedure  
  Changing the entry area  
Press the <Q> button to toggle  
between the top and bottom entry  
areas.  
  Moving the cursor  
Press the <U> key to move the  
cursor.  
  Entering text  
In the bottom area, press the <V> or <U> key to select a  
character, then press <0> to enter it.  
  Deleting a character  
Press the <L> button to delete a character.  
  Exiting  
After entering the text, press the <M> button to finalize the text  
entry and return to the screen in step 2.  
  Canceling the text entry  
To cancel the text entry, press the <B> button to cancel it and  
return to the screen in step 2.  
You can also enter the copyright information with EOS Utility (provided  
software).  
109  
3Setting the Color SpaceN  
The color space refers to the range of reproducible colors. With this  
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or  
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.  
In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.  
Select [Color space].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [Color  
space], then press <0>.  
Set the desired color space.  
2
  Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then  
press <0>.  
About Adobe RGB  
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other  
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you do not know  
about image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File  
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). The image will look very subdued in a sRGB  
personal computer environment and with printers not compatible with  
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). Post-processing of  
the image with software will therefore be required.  
  If the image is captured with the color space set to Adobe RGB, the file  
name will start with “_MG_” (first character is an underscore).  
 
The ICC profile is not appended. See explanations about the ICC profile  
in the PDF Software Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM.  
110  
5
Advanced Operations  
In Creative Zone modes, you  
can set the shutter speed and/  
or aperture to set the exposure  
as desired. By changing the  
camera settings, you can  
obtain various results.  
  The Micon on the upper right of the page title indicates  
that the function can be used only in Creative Zone modes  
(d/ s/ f/ a/ F).  
  After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the  
LCD panel and viewfinder information will remain displayed  
for approx. 4 sec. (0).  
  Settable functions in Creative Zone modes are listed in  
“Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes”  
on page 276.  
111  
d: Program AE  
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit  
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.  
* <d> stands for Program.  
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.  
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.  
1
Focus the subject.  
  Look through the viewfinder and aim  
2
the selected AF point over the  
subject. Then press the shutter button  
halfway.  
X The AF point which achieves focus  
flashes in red, and the focus  
confirmation light <o> in the  
viewfinder’s bottom right lights (with  
One Shot AF).  
X The shutter speed and aperture will  
be set automatically and displayed in  
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
Check the display.  
  A standard exposure will be obtained  
3
as long as the shutter speed and  
aperture display do not blink.  
Take the picture.  
4
  Compose the shot and press the  
shutter button completely.  
112  
d: Program AE  
  If the “30"” shutter speed and the maximum aperture  
blink, it indicates underexposure.  
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.  
  If the “8000” shutter speed and the minimum aperture  
blink, it indicates overexposure.  
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold  
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the  
lens.  
Differences Between <d> and <1> (Full Auto)  
With <1>, many functions such the AF mode, drive mode, and built-in  
flash are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can  
set are limited. With <d>, only the shutter speed and aperture are set  
automatically. You can freely set the AF mode, drive mode, built-in flash,  
and other functions (p.276).  
About Program Shift  
  In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and  
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while  
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.  
  To do this, press the shutter button down halfway, then turn the <6>  
dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.  
  Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken.  
  Program shift cannot be used with flash.  
113  
s: Shutter-Priority AE  
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically  
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure suiting the brightness  
of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed  
can freeze the action or moving subject. Or a slower shutter speed can  
create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.  
* <s> stands for Time value.  
Frozen action  
Blurred motion  
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)  
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)  
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.  
1
Set the desired shutter speed.  
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
2
the <6> dial.  
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
X The aperture is set automatically.  
3
Check the viewfinder display and  
4 shoot.  
  As long as the aperture is not  
blinking, the exposure will be  
standard.  
114  
s: Shutter-Priority AE  
  If the maximum aperture blinks, it indicates  
underexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until  
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.  
  If the minimum aperture blinks, it indicates  
overexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until  
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.  
Shutter Speed Display  
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the  
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec. Also, “0"5”  
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.  
115  
f: Aperture-Priority AE  
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the  
shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the  
subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher  
f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and  
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower  
f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and  
background fall within acceptable focus.  
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).  
Sharp foreground and background  
Blurred background  
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32) (With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)  
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.  
1
Set the desired aperture.  
2
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <6> dial.  
Focus the subject.  
3
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
X
The shutter speed is set automatically.  
Check the viewfinder display and  
4 shoot.  
 
As long as the shutter speed is not  
blinking, the exposure will be standard.  
116  
f: Aperture-Priority AE  
  If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates  
underexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (smaller  
f/number) until the blinking stops or set a higher ISO  
speed.  
  If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates  
overexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (larger  
f/number) until the blinking stops or set a lower ISO  
speed.  
Aperture Display  
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The  
apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to  
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.  
Depth of Field PreviewN  
Press the depth-of-field preview button  
to stop down the lens to the current  
aperture setting. You can check the  
depth of field (range of acceptable focus)  
through the viewfinder.  
  A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall  
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.  
  The depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as  
you change the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button  
(p.152).  
  The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview  
button is pressed.  
117  
a: Manual Exposure  
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To  
determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the  
viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This  
method is called manual exposure.  
* <a> stands for Manual.  
Set the Mode Dial to <a>.  
1
Set the shutter speed and  
2 aperture.  
  To set the shutter speed, turn the  
<6> dial.  
 
To set the aperture, turn the <  
If the aperture cannot be set, press the  
> button below the < > dial  
), then turn the < > dial.  
5> dial.  
<
R
5
(0  
5
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
Standard exposure index  
Exposure level mark  
3
X
The exposure setting will be displayed in  
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
 
The exposure level mark <s> indicates  
how far the current exposure level is from  
the standard exposure level.  
Set the exposure.  
  Check the exposure level and set the  
4
5
desired shutter speed and aperture.  
Take the picture.  
If the [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.101) is set to anything other than  
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure has been set.  
118  
q Selecting the Metering ModeN  
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.  
In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.  
Press the <n> button. (9)  
1
Select the metering mode.  
2
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <6> dial.  
q Evaluative metering  
This is a general-purpose metering mode suited for  
portraits and even backlit subjects. The camera  
sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene.  
w Partial metering  
Effective when the background is much brighter than  
the subject due to backlighting, etc. Partial metering  
covers approx. 6.5% of the viewfinder area at the  
center.  
r Spot metering  
This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or  
scene. The metering is weighted at the center  
covering approx. 2.8% of the viewfinder area.  
e Center-weighted average metering  
The metering is weighted at the center and then  
averaged for the entire scene.  
119  
Setting Exposure CompensationN  
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken  
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.  
Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-  
stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator on the LCD  
panel and in the viewfinder can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If  
you want to set the exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops,  
you should use the Quick Control screen (p.44) or follow the  
instructions for [2 Exp. comp./AEB] on the next page.  
Set the Mode Dial to <d>, <s>,  
or <f>.  
1
Set the exposure compensation  
Increased exposure for a brighter image  
Decreased exposure for a darker image  
2 amount.  
  After pressing the shutter button  
halfway (0), turn the <5> dial. If  
the exposure compensation cannot  
be set, press the <R> button  
below the <5> dial (0), then turn  
the <5> dial.  
Take the picture.  
3
  To cancel the exposure  
compensation, set the exposure  
compensation amount back to <E>.  
If the [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.101) is set to anything other than  
Disable], the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure has been set.  
[
  The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you  
set the power switch to <2>.  
 
Be careful not to turn the <  
inadvertently. It is safest to set the [6 Lock 5] menu to [Enable]. Before  
turning the < > dial, press the < > button ( ), then turn the < > dial.  
5> dial and change the exposure compensation  
5
R
0
5
  If the amount set exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level  
indicator will display <I> or <J>.  
120  
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N  
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera  
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three  
successive shots. This is called AEB.  
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.  
Select [Expo. comp./AEB].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [Expo.  
comp./AEB], then press <0>.  
Set the AEB amount.  
2
 
 
Turn the <  
Press the <  
6
U
> dial to set the AEB amount.  
> key to set the exposure  
compensation amount. If AEB is  
combined with exposure compensation,  
AEB will be applied centering on the  
exposure compensation amount.  
AEB amount  
  Press <0> to set it.  
X
When you exit the menu, <  
h> and the AEB  
level will be displayed on the LCD panel.  
Take the picture.  
3
 
Focus and press the shutter button completely.  
The three bracketed shots will be taken in this  
sequence: Standard exposure, decreased  
exposure, and increased exposure.  
Canceling AEB  
  Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB amount display.  
  AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch  
to <2> or when the flash is ready to fire.  
  If the drive mode is set to <u>, you must press the shutter button three  
times. When <o> or <i> is set and you hold down the shutter button  
completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously. Then  
the camera will stop shooting. When <Q> or <k> is set, the three  
bracketed shots will be taken continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.  
  Neither flash nor bulb exposures can be used with AEB.  
121  
AAE LockN  
Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure  
metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure  
setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take  
the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects.  
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
1
X
The exposure setting will be displayed.  
Press the <A> button. (0)  
2
3
X The <A> icon lights in the viewfinder  
to indicate that the exposure setting is  
locked (AE lock).  
  Each time you press the <A> button,  
it locks the current auto exposure  
setting.  
Recompose and take the picture.  
  If you want to maintain the AE lock  
while taking more shots, hold down  
the <A> button and press the shutter  
button to take another shot.  
AE Lock Effects  
AF Point Selection Method (p.78)  
Metering Mode  
(p.119)  
Automatic Selection  
AE lock is applied at the AF AE lock is applied at the  
point that achieved focus. selected AF point.  
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.  
Manual Selection  
q*  
wre  
* When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the center AF point.  
122  
F: Bulb Exposures  
When bulb is set, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the  
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter  
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night  
scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long  
exposures.  
Set the Mode Dial to <F>.  
1
Set the desired aperture.  
2
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <6> or <5> dial.  
Take the picture.  
3
  While you hold down the shutter  
button, the exposure will continue.  
X The elapsed exposure time will be  
displayed on the LCD panel.  
Elapsed exposure time  
  Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image might  
look a little grainy.  
  When [8C.Fn II -1: Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [1: Auto] or  
[2: On], noise generated by the bulb exposure can be reduced (p.254).  
  For bulb exposures, using a tripod and Remote Switch (p.124) is  
recommended.  
  You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.126) for bulb  
exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the  
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button  
again to stop the bulb exposure.  
123  
F: Bulb Exposures  
Using the Eyepiece Cover  
If you take a picture without looking at the viewfinder, light entering the  
eyepiece can throw off the exposure. To prevent this, use the eyepiece  
cover (p.23) attached to the camera strap.  
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the  
eyepiece cover is unnecessary.  
Remove the eyecup.  
1
  Push the bottom of the eyecup to  
remove.  
Attach the eyepiece cover.  
2
  Slide the eyepiece cover down into  
the eyepiece groove to attach it.  
FUsing the Remote Switch  
Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) comes with an approx.  
60cm/2.0ft cord. When connected to the camera’s remote control  
terminal, Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to press the shutter  
button halfway and completely.  
124  
Mirror LockupN  
Although using the self-timer or Remote Switch can prevent camera  
shake, using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations (mirror shock)  
can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups  
(macro photography).  
When [8C.Fn III -5: Mirror lockup] is set to [1: Enable], shooting  
with mirror lockup will be possible (p.257).  
1 Focus the subject, then press the shutter button  
completely.  
X The mirror will swing up.  
2 Press the shutter button completely again.  
X The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.  
  In very bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,  
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.  
  Do not point the camera toward the sun. The sun’s heat can scorch and  
damage the shutter curtains.  
  If you use the self-timer and mirror lockup in combination with a bulb  
exposure, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay  
time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the  
self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no  
picture will be taken.  
  When [1: Enable] is set, single shooting will take effect even if the drive  
mode is set to continuous.  
  When the self-timer is set to <Q> or <k>, the picture will be taken  
after 10 sec. or 2 sec. respectively.  
  If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down  
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the  
mirror again.  
  For mirror lockup, using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) is  
recommended (p.124).  
  You can also lockup the mirror and shoot with a remote controller (sold  
separately, p.126). Setting the remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is  
recommended.  
125  
R Remote Control Shooting  
With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you  
can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet  
from the camera. You can either shoot immediately or  
use a 2-sec. delay.  
You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5.  
Focus the subject.  
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to  
2 <MF>.  
  You can also shoot with <f>.  
Press the <R> button. (9)  
3
Select the self-timer.  
4
  Look at the LCD panel and turn the  
<6> dial to select <Q> or <k>.  
Press the remote controller’s  
5 transmit button.  
  Point the remote controller toward the  
camera’s remote control sensor and  
press the transmit button.  
X The self-timer lamp lights and the  
picture is taken.  
Remote  
control  
sensor  
Camera misoperation may occur near certain types of fluorescent lights.  
During wireless remote control, try to keep the camera away from  
fluorescent light sources.  
126  
Q Displaying the Electronic Level  
To help level the camera, the electronic level can be displayed on the  
LCD monitor, in the viewfinder, and on the LCD panel. Note that only  
the horizontal level will be displayed. (No vertical level.)  
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor  
Press the <B> button.  
1
  Each time you press the <B>  
button, the screen display will  
change.  
  Display the electronic level.  
  If the electronic level does not  
appear, set the menu’s [7 INFO.  
button display options] option to  
display the electronic level (p.266).  
Check the camera’s tilt.  
2
  The horizontal tilt is displayed in 1°  
increments.  
  When the red line turns green, it  
indicates that the tilt is corrected.  
Horizontal level  
  Even when the tilt is corrected, there is a margin of error of ±1°.  
  If the camera is significantly tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error  
will be greater.  
The electronic level can also be displayed during Live View shooting and  
movie shooting (p.154, 176).  
127  
Q Displaying the Electronic Level  
Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder  
The electronic level display in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel  
uses the exposure level scale. Note that the electronic level is only  
displayed when shooting in horizontal orientation. It is not displayed in  
vertical orientation.  
Select Custom Functions IV.  
1
  Select the [8C.Fn IV: Operation/  
Others] menu, then press <0>.  
Select C.Fn IV -2 [Assign SET  
2 button].  
  Press the <U> key to select [2]  
[Assign SET button], then press  
<0>.  
Select [5]: [sViewfinder Q].  
3
  Press the <U> key to select [5]:  
[sViewfinder Q], then press  
<0>.  
  Press the <M> button two times to  
exit the menu.  
Display the electronic level.  
  Press <0>.  
4
4° right tilt  
4° left tilt  
X
In the viewfinder and on the LCD panel,  
the electronic level will use the  
exposure scale to display the horizontal  
tilt up to ±9° in 1° increments.  
  Pressing the shutter button halfway  
will switch the exposure level scale  
back to indicating the exposure level.  
  Even when the tilt is corrected, there still may be a margin of error of ±1°.  
  If you point the camera up or down, the electronic level will not be  
correctly displayed.  
128  
6
Flash Photography  
With the built-in flash, you can  
shoot with autoflash, manual  
flash, and wireless flash.  
In Creative Zone modes, just press the <D> button to  
pop-up the built-in flash. To retract the built-in flash,  
push it back down with your fingers.  
In Basic Zone modes (except <7> <3> <5>), the  
built-in flash will pop-up and fire automatically in low-  
light and backlit conditions. The <C> mode enables  
you to select between automatic flash firing and flash  
on/off (p.61).  
Flash cannot be used with movie shooting.  
129  
DUsing the Built-in Flash  
In Basic Zone modes and Creative Zone modes, the shutter speed and  
aperture for flash photography will be set as shown below. By default,  
E-TTL II autoflash control (flash autoexposure) will be used in all shooting  
modes.  
Shooting  
Mode  
Shutter Speed  
Aperture  
1 C  
2 4  
Automatically set within 1/250 sec. - 1/60 sec. Automatically set  
Automatically set within 1/250 sec. - 2 sec. Automatically set  
Automatically set within 1/250 sec. - 1/60 sec. Automatically set  
6
d
s
f
a
Set manually within 1/250 sec. - 30 sec.  
Automatically set  
Automatically set  
Set manually  
Set manually within 1/250 sec. - 30 sec.  
Set manually  
While you hold down the shutter button, the  
exposure will continue.  
F
Set manually  
With [8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in Av mode] (p.253), the following  
options for flash automatic setting can be selected: Applicable in the <f>  
shooting mode.  
• 0: Auto*  
• 1: 1/250 - 1/60 sec. auto  
• 2: 1/250 sec. (fixed)  
* Normally, the sync speed is set automatically within 1/250 sec. to 30 sec.  
to suit the ambient brightness. In low light, the main subject is exposed  
with the automatic flash, and the background is exposed with a slow  
shutter speed set automatically. The standard exposure will be obtained  
for both the subject and the background (automatic slow flash sync  
speed). With slow shutter speeds, using a tripod is recommended.  
130  
DUsing the Built-in Flash  
Effective Range of Built-in Flash  
Aperture  
[Approx. meters/feet]  
ISO Speed  
800 1600  
100  
200  
400  
3200  
6400 H: 12800  
f/3.5 3.5 / 12 5.5 / 17 7.5 / 24 11 / 34 15 / 49 21 / 69 30 / 97 42 / 138  
f/4 3 / 11 4.5 / 15 6.5 / 21 9 / 30 13 / 43 18 / 60 26 / 85 36 / 121  
f/5.6 2.5 / 7.5 3.5 / 11 4.5 / 15 6.5 / 22 9.5 / 30 13 / 43 19 / 61 26 / 86  
  For close subjects, the subject should be at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away  
when using flash.  
 
Detach the lens hood and keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away from the subject.  
  If the lens has a hood attached or if you are too close to the subject, the  
bottom of the picture might look dark due to the obstructed flash. If you  
use a telephoto lens or a fast lens and the built-in flash is still partially  
obstructed, use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately).  
3Using Red-eye Reduction  
Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can  
reduce red eye. Red-eye reduction will work in any shooting mode  
except <7> <3> <5> <k>.  
  Under the [1] tab, select [Red-eye  
reduc.], then press <0>. Select  
[Enable], then press <0>.  
 
For flash photography, when you press  
the shutter button halfway, the red-eye  
reduction lamp will light. Then when  
you press the shutter button  
completely, the picture will be taken.  
 
The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at the red-  
eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are close to the subject.  
  When you press the shutter button halfway, the  
display on the viewfinder bottom will gradually turn  
off. For best results, take the picture after this display  
turns off.  
  The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.  
131  
DUsing the Built-in Flash  
y Flash Exposure CompensationN  
Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject  
does not come out as desired. You can set flash exposure  
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.  
Display the Quick Control screen.  
  Press the <Q> button (p.44).  
X The Quick Control screen will appear  
1
(7).  
Select [y].  
  Press the <V> and <U> key to  
select [y*], then press <0>.  
X The flash exposure compensation  
screen will appear.  
2
Set the flash exposure  
3 compensation amount.  
  To make the flash exposure brighter,  
turn the <5> dial to the right.  
(Increased exposure)  
Or to make it darker, turn the <5>  
dial to the left. (Decreased exposure)  
X When you press the shutter button  
halfway, the <y> icon will be  
displayed in the viewfinder and on the  
LCD panel.  
  After taking the picture, do steps 1  
to 3 to return the flash exposure  
compensation amount to zero.  
132  
DUsing the Built-in Flash  
  If the [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.101) is not set to [Disable], the  
image may still look bright even if a darker flash exposure has been set.  
  If you set flash exposure compensation with both the camera and EX-  
series Speedlite, the Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation setting  
will override the camera’s. If you have set flash exposure compensation  
with an EX-series Speedlite, any flash exposure compensation set with  
the camera will not take effect.  
  The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you  
set the power switch to <2>.  
  By setting [8C.Fn IV -2: Assign SET button] to [4: sFlash exp.  
comp.], you can just press <0> to display the flash exposure  
compensation setting screen.  
  The camera can also be used to set the EX-series Speedlite’s flash  
exposure compensation in the same way as with the Speedlite.  
133  
DUsing the Built-in Flash  
AFE LockN  
FE (flash exposure) lock obtains and locks the standard flash exposure  
reading for any part of a subject.  
Press the <D> button to pop-up  
the built-in flash.  
  Press the shutter button halfway and  
look in the viewfinder to check that  
the <D> icon is lit.  
1
Focus the subject.  
2
3
Press the <A> button. (8)  
 
Aim the viewfinder center over the subject  
where you want to lock the flash  
exposure, then press the <A> button.  
X The flash will fire a preflash and the  
required flash output is calculated  
and retained in memory.  
X In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed  
for a moment and <d> will light.  
 
Each time you press the <A> button, a  
preflash is fired and the required flash output  
is calculated and retained in memory.  
Take the picture.  
4
  Compose the shot and press the  
shutter button completely.  
X The flash is fired when the picture is  
taken.  
If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash, the  
<D> icon will blink. Get closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.  
134  
3Setting the FlashN  
The built-in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the  
camera’s menu. You can use those menu options for the external  
Speedlite only if the attached EX-series Speedlite are compatible with  
them  
.
The setting procedure is the same as setting a camera menu function.  
Select [Flash control].  
  Under the [1] tab, select [Flash  
control], then press <0>.  
X The flash control screen will appear.  
[Flash firing]  
  Normally, set this to [Enable].  
  If [Disable] is set, both the built-in  
flash and external Speedlite will  
not fire. This is useful when you only  
want to use the flash’s AF-assist  
beam.  
[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting]  
The [Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting]  
menus can set the functions listed on the next page. The functions  
displayed under [External flash func. setting] will vary depending on  
the Speedlite model.  
  Select [Built-in flash func. setting]  
or [External flash func. setting].  
X The flash functions will be displayed.  
The functions not dimmed can be  
selected and set.  
135  
3Setting the FlashN  
[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting]  
Settable Functions  
[Built-in flash  
func. setting]  
[External flash  
func. setting]  
Function  
Page  
Flash mode  
k
k
136  
137  
Shutter sync.  
FEB*  
k
Flash exposure  
compensation  
k
k
132  
137  
E-TTL II flash  
metering  
Zoom*  
k
Wireless flash  
k
139  
* For [FEB] (Flash exposure bracketing) and [Zoom], refer to the Speedlite’s  
instruction manual.  
  Flash mode  
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.  
  [E-TTL II] is the standard mode of  
EX-series Speedlites for automatic  
flash shooting.  
  [Manual flash] is for advanced users  
who want to set the [Flash output]  
(1/1 to 1/128) themselves.  
  Regarding other flash modes, refer to  
your Speedlite’s instruction manual.  
136  
3Setting the FlashN  
  Shutter sync.  
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately  
after the exposure starts.  
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the exposure  
ends. When this is combined with a slow sync speed, you can create  
a trail of light such as from car headlights at night. With 2nd curtain  
sync, two flashes will be fired, once when you press the shutter  
button completely, and once immediately before the exposure ends.  
However, with shutter speeds faster than 1/30 sec., 1st curtain sync  
will automatically take effect.  
If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also set [Hi-speed]  
(e). For details, see the Speedlite’s instruction manual.  
  Flash exposure compensation  
See “y Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 132.  
  E-TTL II flash metering  
For normal flash exposures, set it to [Evaluative].  
If [Average] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire  
metered scene as with an external metering flash. Since flash  
exposure compensation may be necessary depending on the scene,  
this setting is for advanced users.  
  Wireless flash  
See “Using Wireless Flash” on page 139.  
  Clear flash settings  
With the [Built-in flash func. setting] or [External flash func.  
setting] screen displayed, press the <B> button to display the  
screen to clear the flash settings. When you select [OK], the settings  
for the flash will be cleared.  
137  
3Setting the FlashN  
Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions  
Display the Custom Function.  
1
  With the camera ready to shoot with  
an external Speedlite, select  
[External flash C.Fn setting], then  
press <0>.  
Set the Custom Function.  
2
  Press the <U> key to select the  
function number, then set the  
function. The procedure is the same  
as setting the camera’s Custom  
Functions (p.250).  
  To clear all the Custom Function  
settings, select [Clear ext. flash C.Fn  
set.] in step 1.  
138  
Using Wireless FlashN  
The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit with Canon  
Speedlites having a wireless slave feature and wirelessly trigger the  
Speedlite to fire. Be sure to read about wireless flash photography in  
the Speedlite’s instruction manual.  
Slave Unit Settings and Position  
Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and  
set it as follows. Slave unit control settings other than the below are all  
set with the camera. Different types of slave units can be used and  
controlled together.  
(1) Set the Speedlite as a slave unit.  
(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same one as  
the camera’s.  
(3) If you want to set the flash ratio (p.144), set the slave unit ID.  
(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown  
below.  
(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.  
Wireless flash set-up example  
Indoors  
Approx.  
10m  
(32.8ft.)  
Outdoors  
Approx.  
7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Approx.  
80o  
Approx. 5m Approx. 7m  
(16.4ft.)  
(23.0ft.)  
Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off  
To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s <A>  
button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave unit’s test  
firing (PILOT) button to cancel the auto power off.  
139  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite  
This shows the most basic setup for  
fully-automatic wireless flash with one  
Speedlite.  
Steps 1 to 3 and 6 to 7 apply to all  
wireless flash shooting. Therefore,  
these steps are omitted in the other  
wireless flash setups explained on  
the pages hereafter.  
On the menu screens, the <0> and  
<1> icons refer to the external  
Speedlite, and the <3> and <2>  
icons refer to the built-in flash.  
Press the <I> button to pop-up  
the built-in flash.  
  For wireless flash, be sure to pop-up  
1
the built-in flash.  
Select [Flash control].  
2
  Under the [1] tab, select [Flash  
control], then press <0>.  
Select [Built-in flash func.  
3 setting].  
  Select [Built-in flash func. setting],  
then press <0>.  
Select [Flash mode].  
4
  For [Flash mode], select [E-TTL II],  
then press <0>.  
140  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Select [Wireless func.].  
  For [Wireless func.], select [0],  
then press <0>.  
X Under [Wireless func.], [Channel],  
etc., will be displayed.  
5
6
7
Set [Channel].  
  Set the channel (1-4) to the same one  
as the slave unit.  
Select [Firing group].  
  For [Firing group], select [1All],  
then press <0>.  
Take the picture.  
8
  As with normal flash shooting, you  
can set the camera and take the  
picture in the same way.  
  To terminate wireless flash shooting,  
set [Wireless func.] to [Disable].  
  Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.  
  Even if you disable the built-in flash from firing, it will still fire to control  
the slave unit.  
  The slave unit cannot fire a test flash.  
141  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Fully-automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite  
and Built-in Flash  
This shows fully-automatic wireless  
flash shooting with one external  
Speedlite and the built-in flash.  
You can change the flash ratio between  
the external Speedlite and built-in flash  
to adjust how the shadows look on the  
subject.  
Select [Wireless func.].  
1
  Follow step 5 on page 141 to select  
[0:3] for [Wireless func.], then  
press <0>.  
Set the desired flash ratio and  
2 shoot.  
  Select [1:2] and set the flash ratio  
within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio  
to the right of 1:1 (up to 1:8) is not  
possible.  
  If the built-in flash output is not  
enough, set a higher ISO speed  
(p.88).  
The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop  
increments).  
142  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Fully-automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites  
Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or  
separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set.  
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]  
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple  
Speedlites.  
Basic settings:  
Flash mode  
: E-TTL II  
E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative  
Wireless func. : 0  
Channel  
: (Same as slave units)  
[1All] Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit  
Convenient when you need a large flash  
output. All the slave Speedlites will fire at  
the same output and controlled to obtain  
a standard exposure.  
No matter what the slave ID is (A, B, or  
C), all the slave units will fire as one  
group.  
Set [Firing group] to [1All], then  
shoot.  
143  
Using Wireless FlashN  
[1 (A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups  
Divide the slave units into groups A and  
B, and change the flash ratio to obtain  
the desired lighting effect.  
Refer to your Speedlite’s instruction  
manual to set one slave unit’s slave ID  
to A (Group A) and the other slave unit’s  
ID to B (Group B) and position them as  
shown in the illustration.  
A
B
Set [Firing group] to [1 (A:B)].  
1
Set the desired flash ratio and  
2 shoot.  
  Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the  
flash ratio.  
If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.  
The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2-  
stop increments).  
144  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Fully-automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and  
Multiple External Speedlites  
The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained  
on pages 143-144.  
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]  
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple  
Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.  
Basic settings:  
1
Flash mode  
: E-TTL II  
E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative  
Wireless func. : [0+3]  
Channel  
: (Same as slave units)  
Select [Firing group].  
  Select the firing group, then set the  
flash ratio, flash exposure  
2
compensation, and other necessary  
settings before shooting.  
A
B
[1All and 2]  
[1 (A:B) 2]  
145  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Creative Wireless Flash Shooting  
Flash exposure compensation  
When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation  
can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below)  
which can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless func.] and  
[Firing group] settings.  
[Flash exp. comp]  
  The flash exposure compensation is  
applied to the built-in flash and all  
external Speedlites.  
[2 exp. comp.]  
  The flash exposure compensation is  
applied to the built-in flash.  
[1 exp. comp.]  
  The flash exposure compensation is  
applied to all external Speedlites.  
[A,B exp. comp.]  
  The flash exposure compensation is  
applied to both groups A and B.  
FE lock  
If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <A> button to  
set FE lock.  
146  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash  
When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], the flash output can be set  
manually. The flash output settings ([1 flash output], [Group A  
output], etc.) that can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless  
func.] setting (see below).  
[Wireless func.: 0]  
  [Firing group: 1All]: The manual  
flash output setting will be applied to  
all the external Speedlites.  
  [Firing group: 1 (A:B)]: You can set  
the flash output separately for slave  
groups A and B.  
[Wireless func.: 0+3]  
  [Firing group: 1All and 2]: The  
flash output can be set separately for  
the external Speedlite(s) and built-in  
flash.  
  [Firing group: 1 (A:B) 2]: You can  
set the flash output separately for  
slave groups A and B. You can also  
set the flash output for the built-in  
flash.  
147  
External Speedlites  
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites  
Basically operates like a built-in flash for easy operation.  
When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the  
camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other  
words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the  
built-in flash.  
For detailed instructions, see the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction  
manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features  
of EX-series Speedlites.  
Shoe-mount Speedlites  
Macro Lites  
  With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings  
(p.135), only [1 exp. comp] and [E-TTL II meter.] can be set for  
[External flash func. setting]. (Certain EX-series Speedlites also  
enable [Shutter sync.] to be set.)  
  If the flash metering mode is set to TTL autoflash with the Speedlite’s  
Custom Function, the flash will fire at full output only.  
Canon Speedlites other than the EX-series  
  With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL  
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.  
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or  
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before  
shooting.  
  When using a Speedlite which has manual flash mode, shoot in the  
manual flash mode.  
148  
External Speedlites  
Using Non-Canon Flash Units  
Sync Speed  
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at  
1/250 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, since the  
flash duration is longer than compact flash units, set the sync speed  
within 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. Be sure to test the flash synchronization  
before shooting.  
Cautions for Live View shooting  
If you use a non-Canon flash with Live View shooting, set [zSilent  
shooting] to [Disable] (p.159). The flash will not fire if it is set to [Mode  
1] or [Mode 2].  
  If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to  
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and  
malfunction may result.  
  The camera does not have a PC terminal.  
  Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It might  
not fire.  
149  
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor  
(Live View Shooting)  
You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s  
LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.  
Live View shooting is effective for still subjects which do  
not move.  
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the  
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.  
Using a tripod is recommended.  
About Remote Live View Shooting  
With EOS Utility (provided software) installed in your computer, you  
can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely while  
viewing the computer screen. For details, see the PDF Software  
Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM.  
151  
AShooting with the LCD Monitor  
Display the Live View image.  
1
  Press the <A> button.  
X The image will appear on the LCD  
monitor.  
 
The image’s field of view is approx. 100%.  
Focus the subject.  
2
  When you press the shutter button  
halfway, the camera will focus with  
the current AF mode (p.160-167).  
Take the picture.  
  Press the shutter button completely.  
3
X
The picture will be taken and the captured  
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.  
After the image review ends, the camera will  
return to Live View shooting automatically.  
X
  Press the <A> button to exit Live  
View shooting.  
About the White < > and Red <E> Internal Temperature  
Warning Icons  
  If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live  
View shooting or a high ambient temperature, a white < > icon will  
appear. If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed, the image  
quality of still photos may deteriorate. You should stop the Live View  
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.  
 
If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white <  
>
icon is displayed, a red < > icon will start blinking. This blinking icon is a  
E
warning that the Live View shooting will soon be terminated automatically. If  
this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal  
temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.  
  Live View shooting at high temperature for a prolonged period will cause  
the < > and <E> icons to appear sooner. When not shooting, turn off  
the camera.  
152  
AShooting with the LCD Monitor  
Enabling Live View Shooting  
Set the [zLive View shoot.] menu to  
[Enable].  
Battery Life with Live View Shooting [Approx. number of shots]  
Shooting Conditions  
Temperature  
No Flash  
350  
50% Flash Use  
At 23°C / 73°F  
At 0°C / 32°F  
320  
280  
310  
  The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6 and CIPA  
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.  
  With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, the total time of Live View shooting is  
possible as follows: Approx. 2 hr. 20 min. at 23°C / 73°F.  
  During Live View shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The  
sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.  
  Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 168-169.  
  You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.  
  When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot  
will be taken.  
  With the Live View image displayed, you can playback <x> images.  
  If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn  
off automatically as set with [5 Auto power off] (p.50). If [5 Auto  
power off] is set to [Off], the Live View function will stop automatically  
after 30 min. (camera power remains on).  
  With the AV cable (provided) or HDMI cable (sold separately), you can  
display the Live View image on a TV (p.209, 212).  
153  
AShooting with the LCD Monitor  
About the Information Display  
  Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will  
change.  
AF mode  
d: Live mode  
c : Face detection Live mode  
AF point (Quick mode)  
Magnifying frame  
f: Quick mode  
Histogram  
Drive mode  
Eye-Fi card  
transmission  
status  
White balance  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
FEB  
AEB  
Image-recording quality  
Flash exposure  
compensation  
Exposure  
simulation  
AE lock  
Battery check  
Flash-ready  
Highlight tone  
priority  
Shutter speed  
Picture Style  
ISO speed  
Possible shots  
Aperture  
Exposure level indicator/AEB range  
  The histogram can be displayed when [Expo. simulation: Enable] has  
been set (p.158).  
 
You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button (p.266).  
Note that if the AF mode is set to [uLive mode] or the camera is connected  
to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot be displayed.  
  When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image  
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.  
  If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is not being  
displayed at the suitable brightness due to low or bright light conditions.  
However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting.  
  If flash is used or bulb is set, the <g> icon and histogram will be  
grayed out (for your reference). The histogram might not be properly  
displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.  
154  
AShooting with the LCD Monitor  
Final Image Simulation  
The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white  
balance, etc., in the Live View image so you can see what the captured  
image will look like. During still photo shooting, the Live View image will  
automatically reflect the settings listed below.  
Final image simulation for still images  
  Picture Style  
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will  
be reflected.  
  White balance  
  White balance correction  
  Shoot by ambience selection  
  Shoot by lighting or scene type  
  Exposure (With Exposure Simulation set to [Enable])  
  Depth of field (With depth-of-field preview button ON)  
  Auto Lighting Optimizer  
  Peripheral illumination correction  
  Highlight tone priority  
  Aspect ratio (Image area confirmation)  
155  
Shooting Function Settings  
f / R / iSettings  
During Live View shooting, you can press the <f>, <R>, or <i>  
button to display the respective setting screen on the LCD monitor, and  
press the <U> key to set the function.  
QQuick Control  
With the LCD monitor displaying an image, pressing the <Q> button will  
display the settable functions. In Basic Zone modes, you can change the AF  
mode and the settings listed on page 67. In Creative Zone modes, you can  
set the AF mode, drive mode, white balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting  
Optimizer, image-recording quality, and flash exposure compensation.  
Press the <Q> button.  
1
X The settable functions will be  
highlighted in blue.  
  When <f> is selected, the AF  
points will also be displayed.  
Select a function and set it.  
2
  Press the <V> key to select a  
function.  
X The setting of the selected function is  
displayed at the bottom.  
 
Turn the <  
the setting. If you press <  
5
> or <  
6
> dial to change  
>, the  
0
setting screen of the respective function  
is displayed (except for the AF point).  
 
The metering mode will be fixed to evaluative metering for Live View shooting.  
  In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the  
depth-of-field preview button.  
  During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also  
be applied to subsequent shots.  
  You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.126) for Live  
View shooting.  
156  
zMenu Function Settings  
Function settings particular to Live View  
shooting are explained here. The menu  
options under the [z] tab are explained  
below.  
The functions settable on this menu  
screen only apply during Live View  
shooting. These functions do not take  
effect during viewfinder shooting.  
  Live View shooting  
Set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].  
  AF mode  
You can select [Live mode] (p.160), [uLive mode] (p.161), or  
[Quick mode] (p.165).  
  Grid display  
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines.  
  Aspect ratioN  
The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1].  
The following aspect ratios will be indicated with lines on the Live  
View image: [4:3] [16:9] [1:1].  
JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio.  
RAW images will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. Since  
the aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the  
image will be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you  
process the RAW image with the provided software. In the case of  
the [4:3], [16:9], and [1:1] aspect ratios, the aspect-ratio lines will  
appear during image playback, but the lines are not actually drawn  
on the image.  
157  
zMenu Function Settings  
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count  
Quality  
3:2  
4:3  
16:9  
1:1  
3
5184x3456  
4608x3456  
5184x2912*  
3456x3456  
1
(18.0 megapixels) (16.0 megapixels) (15.1 megapixels) (11.9 megapixels)  
3456x2304 3072x2304 3456x1944 2304x2304  
(8.0 megapixels) (7.0 megapixels) (6.7 megapixels) (5.3 megapixels)  
3888x2592 3456x2592 3888x2188* 2592x2592  
(10.1 megapixels) (9.0 megapixels) (8.5 megapixels) (6.7 megapixels)  
2592x1728 2304x1728 2592x1456* 1728x1728  
(4.5 megapixels) (4.0 megapixels) (3.8 megapixels) (3.0 megapixels)  
1920x1280 1696x1280* 1920x1080 1280x1280  
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)  
720x480 640x480 720x400* 480x480  
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)  
4
41  
a
61  
b
c
  For asterisked image-recording quality, the pixel count does not exactly  
match the set aspect ratio.  
  The area displayed for aspect ratios with an asterisk is slightly larger  
than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD monitor  
when shooting.  
  If you print images shot with the EOS 60D with a 1:1 aspect ratio using  
direct printing on a different camera, the image might not be correctly  
printed.  
  Exposure simulationN  
Exposure simulation displays and simulates how the brightness of  
the actual image (exposure) will look. The [Enable] and [Disable]  
settings are explained below:  
Enable (g)  
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual  
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure  
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.  
Disable (E)  
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live  
View image easy to see.  
158  
zMenu Function Settings  
  Silent shootingN  
• Mode 1  
The shooting operation noise is quieter than with normal shooting.  
Continuous shooting is also possible. High-speed continuous  
shooting will be approx. 5 fps.  
• Mode 2  
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will  
be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the  
camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the  
shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will  
resume. The shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if  
continuous shooting is set, only a single shot can be taken in this  
mode.  
• Disable  
If you use a TS-E lens to make vertical shift movements or use  
an Extension Tube, be sure to set this to [Disable]. Setting it to  
[Mode 1] or [Mode 2] will result in incorrect or irregular exposures.  
When you press the shutter button completely, the shutter will  
sound like it took two shots. However, only one shot will be taken.  
  If you use flash, the [Disable] operation will take effect even if you had  
set it to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].  
  When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. (The flash will not  
fire if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].)  
  Metering timerN  
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock  
time).  
If you select [yDust Delete Data], [6 Sensor cleaning], [7 Clear all  
camera settings], or [7 Firmware Ver.], the Live View shooting will be  
terminated.  
159  
Using AF to Focus  
Selecting the AF Mode  
The AF modes available are [Live mode], [u Live mode] (face  
detection, p.161), and [Quick mode] (p.165).  
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to  
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.167).  
Select the AF mode.  
  Under the [z] tab, select [AF mode].  
  While the Live View image is  
displayed, you can press the <f>  
button to select the AF mode on the  
setting screen displayed.  
Live Mode: d  
The image sensor is used to focus. Although AF is possible with the  
Live View image displayed, the AF operation will take longer than  
with the Quick mode. Also, achieving focus may be more difficult than  
with the Quick mode.  
Display the Live View image.  
  Press the <A> button.  
X The image will appear on the LCD  
monitor.  
1
X The AF point < > will appear.  
Move the AF point.  
2
AF point  
  You can use <9> to move the AF  
point to where you want to focus (it  
cannot go to the edges of the picture).  
  To return the AF point to the center,  
press the <L> button.  
160  
Using AF to Focus  
Focus the subject.  
3
  Aim the AF point over the subject and  
press the shutter button halfway.  
X When focus is achieved, the AF point  
will turn green and the beeper will  
sound.  
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point  
will turn orange.  
Take the picture.  
4
  Check the focus and exposure, then  
press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture (p.152).  
u(Face detection) Live Mode: c  
With the same AF method as the Live mode, human faces are detected  
and focused. Have the target person face the camera.  
Display the Live View image.  
  Press the <A> button.  
X The image will appear on the LCD  
monitor.  
1
  When a face is detected, the <p>  
frame will appear over the face to be  
focused.  
  If multiple faces are detected, <q>  
will be displayed. Use <9> to move  
the <q> frame over the target face.  
161  
Using AF to Focus  
Focus the subject.  
2
3
  Press the shutter button halfway and  
the camera will focus the face  
covered by the <p> frame.  
X When focus is achieved, the AF point  
will turn green and the beeper will  
sound.  
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point  
will turn orange.  
  If a face cannot be detected, the AF  
point < > will be displayed and AF  
will be executed at the center.  
Take the picture.  
  Check the focus and exposure, then  
press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture (p.152).  
  If the focus is way off, face detection will not be possible. If the lens  
enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to  
<AF>, turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus. The face will then be  
detected and <p> will be displayed.  
  An object other than a human face might be detected as a face.  
  Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the  
picture, too bright or too dark, titled horizontally or diagonally, or partially  
hidden.  
  The <p> focusing frame might cover only part of the face.  
  When you press the <L> button, the AF mode will switch to the Live  
mode (p.160). You can press the <9> to move the AF point. Press the  
<L> button again to return to the u(face detection) Live mode.  
  Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the  
picture, the <p> will be grayed out. Then if you press the shutter button  
halfway, the center AF point < > will be used to focus.  
162  
Using AF to Focus  
Live Mode and  
AF operation  
u
(Face Detection) Live Mode Notes  
  Focusing will take slightly longer.  
  Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button  
halfway will focus again.  
  The image brightness may change during and after the AF  
operation.  
  If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,  
the screen might flicker and focusing can be difficult. If this happens,  
stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light  
source first.  
  If you press the <u> button in the Live mode, the image will be  
magnified at the AF point. If focusing is difficult in the magnified view,  
return to the normal view and autofocus. Note that the AF speed  
may differ between the normal and magnified views.  
  If you autofocus in the Live mode’s normal view and then magnify  
the image, the focus might be off.  
  In the uLive mode, pressing the <u> button will not magnify the  
image.  
  In the Live mode or u(face detection) Live mode, if you shoot a  
peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the center AF point  
over the subject to focus, then take the picture.  
  The AF-assist beam will not be emitted.  
163  
Using AF to Focus  
Shooting conditions which can make focusing difficult:  
  Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid-color, flat  
surfaces.  
  Subjects in low light.  
  Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the  
horizontal direction.  
  Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps  
changing.  
  Night scenes or points of light.  
  Under fluorescent lighting or when the image flickers.  
  Extremely small subjects.  
  Subjects at the edge of the picture.  
  Subjects strongly reflecting light.  
  The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject (such as an  
animal in a cage).  
  Subjects which keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep  
still due to camera shake or subject blur.  
  A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.  
  Autofocusing while the subject is way out of focus.  
  Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.  
  A special effects filter is used.  
164  
Using AF to Focus  
Quick Mode: f  
The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in the One-Shot AF mode  
(p.76), using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.  
Although you can focus the target area quickly, the Live View image  
will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.  
AF point  
Display the Live View image.  
1
  Press the <A> button.  
X The image will appear on the LCD  
monitor.  
  The small boxes on the screen are  
the AF points, and the larger box is  
the magnifying frame.  
Magnifying frame  
Select the AF point. N  
2
  When you press the <Q> button, the  
Quick Control screen will appear.  
X The settable functions will be  
highlighted in blue.  
  Press the <V> key to make the AF  
point selectable.  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to select  
the AF point.  
165  
Using AF to Focus  
Focus the subject.  
3
  Aim the AF point over the subject and  
press the shutter button halfway.  
X The Live View image will turn off, the  
reflex mirror will go back down, and  
AF will be executed.  
X When focus is achieved, the beeper  
will sound and the Live View image  
will reappear.  
X The AF point used to focus will light in  
green.  
Take the picture.  
4
  Check the focus and exposure, then  
press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture (p.152).  
You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture while the  
Live View image is displayed.  
166  
Focusing Manually  
You can magnify the image and focus precisely manually.  
Set the lens focus mode switch to  
<MF>.  
  Turn the lens focusing ring to focus  
1
roughly.  
Move the magnifying frame.  
2
  Use <9> to move the magnifying  
frame to the position where you want  
to focus.  
  To return the magnifying frame to the  
center, press the <L> button.  
Magnifying frame  
Magnify the image.  
  Press the <u> button.  
X The area within the magnifying frame  
will be magnified.  
3
  Each time you press the <u> button,  
the view will change as follows:  
5x  
10x  
Normal view  
Focus manually.  
4
5
  While looking at the magnified image,  
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.  
  After achieving focus, press the <u>  
button to return to the normal view.  
AE lock  
Magnified area position  
Magnification  
Take the picture.  
  Check the focus and exposure, then  
press the shutter button to take the  
picture (p.152).  
167  
Notes About the Live View Image  
  Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image might not  
reflect the brightness of the captured image.  
  If the light source within the image changes, the screen might flicker. If  
this happens, stop the Live View shooting and resume shooting under  
the actual light source to be used.  
  If you point the camera in a different direction, it might throw off the Live  
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness  
level stabilizes before shooting.  
  If there is a very bright light source in the picture, such as the sun, the  
bright area might appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual  
captured image will correctly show the bright area.  
  In low light, if you set the [6 LCD brightness] to a bright setting,  
chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image. However, the  
chrominance noise will not be recorded in the captured image.  
  When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more  
pronounced than it really is.  
168  
Notes About the Shooting Results  
  When you shoot continuously with the Live View function for a long  
period, the camera’s internal temperature may increase and it can  
degrade image quality. Terminate Live View shooting when not shooting  
images.  
  Before taking a long exposure, stop Live View shooting temporarily and  
wait several minutes before shooting. This is to prevent image  
degradation.  
  Live View shooting in high temperatures and at high ISO speeds may  
cause noise or irregular colors.  
  When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (banding, dots of light, etc.)  
may become noticeable.  
  If you take the picture during magnified view, the exposure might not  
come out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.  
During the magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be  
displayed in red. Even if you take the picture during magnified view, the  
image will be captured in the normal view.  
  If the [2 Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.101) menu is not set to [Disable],  
the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation  
or flash exposure compensation has been set.  
Custom Function Notes  
  During Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take  
effect (p.251).  
Notes About Lenses and Flash  
  The focus preset feature on super telephoto lenses cannot be used.  
  FE lock is not possible when the built-in flash or an external Speedlite is  
used. The external Speedlite’s modeling flash also cannot be used.  
169  
8
Shooting Movies  
Set the Mode Dial to <k> to  
shoot movies. The movie  
recording format will be MOV.  
Cards which can record movies  
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity SD card with SD  
Speed Class 6 “ ” or higher rating.  
If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie  
might not be recorded properly. And if you playback a movie on a  
card having a slow reading speed, the movie might not playback  
properly.  
To check the card’s read/write speed, refer to the card  
manufacturer’s Web site.  
About Full HD 1080  
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-  
Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning  
lines).  
171  
kShooting Movies  
Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to playback  
movies (p.209, 212).  
Autoexposure Shooting  
Set the Mode Dial to <k>.  
1
X The reflex mirror will make a sound,  
then the image will appear on the  
LCD monitor.  
Focus the subject.  
2
  Before shooting a movie, autofocus  
or manual focus (p.160-167).  
  When you press the shutter button  
halfway, the camera will focus with  
the current AF mode.  
Shoot the movie.  
3
  Press the <A> button to start  
shooting a movie. To stop movie  
shooting, press <A> again.  
X While the movie is being shot, the  
o” mark will be displayed on the  
upper right of the screen.  
Recording movie  
Microphone  
172  
kShooting Movies  
  During movie shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s  
heat can damage the camera’s internal components.  
  Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 187 and 188.  
  If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages  
168 and 169.  
About the White < > and Red <E> Internal Temperature  
Warning Icons  
  If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie  
shooting or a high ambient temperature, a white < > icon will appear.  
Even if you shoot a movie while this icon is displayed, the movie’s image  
quality will not be affected. However, if you switch to still shooting, the  
image quality of the still photos may deteriorate. You should stop  
shooting still photos and allow the camera to cool down.  
  If the camera’s internal temperature further increases while the white  
<
> icon is displayed, a red <E> icon will start blinking. This blinking  
icon is a warning that the movie shooting will soon be terminated  
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the  
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the  
camera rest for a while.  
  Movie shooting at high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the  
<
> and <E> icons to appear sooner. When not shooting, turn off the  
camera.  
  You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.  
  AE lock is possible by pressing the <A> button (p.122). To cancel AE  
lock during movie shooting, press the <S> button.  
  The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture are set automatically.  
  By turning the <5> dial, you can set exposure compensation.  
  Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed and  
aperture (p.176) on the screen’s bottom left. This is the exposure setting  
for taking a still photo.  
173  
kShooting Movies  
Manual Exposure Shooting  
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for  
movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for  
advanced users.  
Set the Mode Dial to <k>.  
1
X The reflex mirror will make a sound,  
then the image will appear on the  
LCD monitor.  
Select [Movie exposure].  
2
  Press the <M> button and under  
the [n] tab, select [Movie  
exposure], then press <0>.  
Select [Manual].  
  Select [Manual], then press <0>.  
  Exit the menu.  
3
Set the shutter speed and  
4 aperture.  
<6> <5>  
  To set the shutter speed, turn the  
<6> dial. The settable shutter  
speeds depend on the frame rate  
<9>.  
8
6
/
/
7
5
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.  
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.  
/
4
  To set the aperture, turn the <5>  
dial. If it cannot be set, press the  
<R> button (8), then turn the  
<5> dial.  
174  
kShooting Movies  
Set the ISO speed.  
  Press the <i> button.  
X The ISO speed setting screen will  
appear on the LCD monitor.  
  Press the <U> key to set the ISO  
speed.  
5
• Auto ISO setting : ISO 100 - 6400  
• Manual ISO setting: ISO 100 - 6400  
Focus and shoot the movie.  
6
  The procedure is the same as steps 2  
and 3 for “Autoexposure Shooting”  
(p.172).  
  AE lock and exposure compensation cannot be set.  
  Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not  
recommended since it will record the changes in the exposure.  
  If you use a lens whose maximum aperture changes while you zoom,  
you should not zoom while shooting a movie. Zooming while shooting a  
movie may record changes in the exposure.  
  If you shoot a movie under fluorescent lighting, the movie image might  
flicker.  
  With Auto ISO, the standard movie exposure will usually be obtained  
even if the light level changes.  
  When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.  
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less  
smooth the subject’s movement will look.  
  If you playback the movie with “Shooting information display” (p.192), the  
shooting mode, shutter speed, and aperture will not be displayed. The  
image information (Exif) will record the settings used at the start of the  
movie shooting.  
175  
kShooting Movies  
About the Information Display  
 
Each time you press the <B  
> button, the information display will change.  
Picture Style  
AF mode  
d: Live mode  
c : Face detection  
Live mode  
AF point (Quick mode)  
Magnifying frame  
f: Quick mode  
Drive mode  
Recording  
movie  
White balance  
Auto Lighting Optimizer  
Image-recording  
quality  
Movie recording size  
Eye-Fi card  
transmission  
status  
Battery check  
AE lock  
Movie exposure  
Frame rate  
L
K
: Autoexposure  
:
Manual  
Shutter speed  
exposure  
Aperture  
Highlight tone priority  
Rec. level : Manual  
ISO speed  
Movie shooting remaining time*/  
Elapsed time  
Possible shots  
Exposure compensation amount  
* Applies to a single movie clip.  
 
You can display the electronic level by pressing the <  
When you start shooting a movie, the electronic level will turn off. To display the  
electronic level again, stop the movie shooting and press the < > button.  
Note that if the AF mode is set to [ Live mode] or the camera is connected to  
a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.209), the electronic level cannot be displayed.  
B> button (p.266).  
B
u
  If there is no card in the camera, the movie shooting remaining time will  
be displayed in red.  
  When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will  
change to the elapsed time.  
176  
kShooting Movies  
  One continuous movie will be recorded as one file.  
  Monaural sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.172).  
  Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external  
microphone (commercially available) equipped with a stereo mini plug  
(3.5mm dia.) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.16).  
  Movie-related settings are under the [n], [o], and [Z] menu  
tabs (p.182).  
 
You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.126) to start and stop  
the movie shooting if the drive mode is < > or < >. Set the shooting timing  
switch to < > (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit button. If the switch is set to  
> (immediate shooting), still photo shooting will take effect.  
Q
k
2
<
o
  With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, the total shooting time will be  
as follows: At 23°C/73°F: Approx. 2 hours, At 0°C/32°F: Approx. 1 hr. 40  
min.  
Final Image Simulation  
The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white  
balance, etc., in the Live View image so you can see what the captured  
image will look like. During movie shooting, the Live View image will  
automatically reflect the settings listed below.  
Final image simulation for movies  
  Picture Style  
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will  
be reflected.  
  White balance  
  Exposure  
  Depth of field  
  Auto Lighting Optimizer  
  Peripheral illumination correction  
  Highlight tone priority  
177  
kShooting Movies  
Shooting Still Photos  
While shooting a movie, you can also  
take a still photo by pressing the shutter  
button completely.  
Shooting Stills in the <k> Mode  
  When the movie-recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the  
aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the movie-recording size is  
[640x480], the aspect ratio will be 4:3.  
  If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record  
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.  
 
The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie  
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is displayed.  
  The card will record the movie and still photo as separate files.  
  Functions particular to still shooting are shown below. Other  
functions will be the same as for movie shooting.  
Function  
Image-recording quality As set in the [1 Quality] menu.  
Shutter speed and aperture set automatically (or set  
Settings  
manually for manual exposures).  
Displayed when the shutter button is pressed  
halfway.  
Exposure setting  
AEB  
Canceled  
All settable*  
Flash off  
Drive mode  
Flash  
* The self-timer can be used before you start shooting a movie. If used during  
movie shooting, the self-timer will switch to single-image shooting.  
Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting, but the  
captured images will not be displayed on the screen. Depending on the still  
photo’s image-recording quality, number of shots during continuous  
shooting, card performance, etc., movie shooting might stop automatically.  
178  
Shooting Function Settings  
f / R / iSettings  
You can press the <f> or <R> button to display the respective  
setting screen on the LCD monitor, and press the <U> key to set the  
function.  
For manual exposure (p.174), press the <i> button and press the  
<U> key to set the ISO speed.  
QQuick Control  
While the LCD monitor displays an image, pressing the <Q> button will  
enable you to set the following: AF mode, drive mode (still photos),  
white balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, image-  
recording quality (still photos), and movie-recording size. (Functions  
in bold apply to all shooting modes.)  
Press the <Q> button.  
1
X The settable functions will be  
highlighted in blue.  
  When <f> is selected, the AF  
points will also be displayed.  
Select a function and set it.  
2
  Press the <V> key to select a  
function.  
X The setting of the selected function is  
displayed at the bottom.  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to  
change the setting. You can also  
press the <U> key to change the  
setting (except for the AF point).  
179  
3Setting the Movie-recording Size  
Under the [o] tab, the [Movie rec.  
size] menu enables you to select the  
movie’s image size [****x****] and frame  
rate [9] (frames recorded per second).  
The 9 (frame rate) switches  
automatically depending on the [6  
Video system] setting.  
  Image size  
[1920x1080]  
[1280x720]  
[640x480]  
: Full HD (Full High-Definition) recording quality.  
: HD (High-Definition) recording quality.  
: Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect  
ratio will be 4:3.  
[Crop 640x480] : Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect  
ratio will be 4:3. It will give a telephoto effect of  
approx. 7x. This shooting mode is called Movie  
crop.  
  Frame rate (fps: frames per second)  
[8] [6] : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America,  
Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).  
[7] [5] : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia,  
China, Australia, etc.).  
[4]  
: Mainly for motion pictures.  
Notes for Movie crop  
  Use a tripod to prevent hand-held camera shake.  
  The Movie crop image cannot be magnified for focusing.  
  Even if the AF mode has been set to [Quick mode], it will switch  
automatically to [Live mode] during movie shooting. Also, in [Live  
mode], the AF point is displayed larger than with other recording sizes.  
  Noise and dots of light may be more noticeable than in other recording  
sizes.  
  Focusing may be difficult if the AF point covers both a near and far  
subject.  
  Still photos cannot be taken.  
180  
3Setting the Movie-recording Size  
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute  
Due to file system limitations, if the file size of a single movie clip  
reaches 4 GB, movie shooting will stop automatically. At [1920x1080]  
and [1280x720], the maximum recording time of a single movie clip will  
be approx. 12 min. At [640x480] and [Crop 640x480], the maximum  
recording time of a single movie clip will be approx. 24 min. To shoot a  
movie again, press the <A> button. (A new movie file starts being  
recorded.)  
Total Recording Time (approx.)  
Movie-recording Size  
File Size  
8GB Card  
16GB Card  
6
[1920x1080]  
5
4
8
7
8
7
22 min.  
44 min.  
330 MB/min.  
[1280x720]  
22 min.  
46 min.  
44 min.  
330 MB/min.  
165 MB/min.  
[640x480]  
[Crop 640x480]  
1 hr. 32 min.  
  An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie  
shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown above  
(p.173).  
  The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec.  
Depending on the subject and the increase in the camera’s internal  
temperature, the movie shooting might stop sooner than 29 min. 59 sec.  
With ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (provided software), you can extract  
a still image from the movie. The still image quality will be as follows:  
Approx. 2 megapixels at [1920x1080], approx. 1 megapixel at [1280x720],  
and approx. 300,000 pixels at [640x480].  
181  
3Menu Function Settings  
The menu options under the [n],  
[o], and [Z] tabs are explained  
below. Note that the settings under the  
[n], [o], and [Z] menu tabs will  
take effect only when the Mode Dial is  
set to <k>. They will not take effect  
when the Mode Dial is set to any another  
shooting mode.  
[n] Menu  
  Movie exposure  
Normally, set this option to [Auto].  
Setting [Movie exposure] to [Manual] enables you to manually set  
the ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture for movie shooting  
(p.174).  
  AF mode  
The AF modes will be the same as described on pages 160-166.  
You can select [Live mode], [uLive mode], or [Quick mode]. Note  
that continuous focusing of a moving subject is not possible.  
  AF with shutter button during k(movie recording)  
When [Enable] is set, AF is possible during movie shooting.  
However, continuous autofocusing is not possible. If you autofocus  
during movie shooting, you might momentarily throw the focus way  
off or change the exposure.  
If the AF mode is [Quick mode], AF will be executed in Live mode.  
182  
3Menu Function Settings  
  AF and metering buttons for k  
You can change the function assigned to the halfway pressing of the  
shutter button, the AF start button, and the AE lock button. You can  
assign the following functions to the buttons in one of ten  
combinations: Metering & AF start, AE lock, metering start, AF stop,  
and no function.  
  kISO speed setting increments  
You can set the ISO speed manually in 1/3- or 1-stop increments.  
  kHighlight tone priority  
If [Enable] is set, highlight detail will be improved. The dynamic  
range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights.  
The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother.  
The settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200-6400. The Auto  
Lighting Optimizer will also be set automatically to [Disable] and  
cannot be changed.  
The AF mode you set will also take effect for Live View shooting (except for  
[Crop 640x480]).  
183  
3Menu Function Settings  
[o] Menu  
  Sound recordingN  
Normally, the built-in microphone will  
record monaural sound. Stereo sound  
recording is possible by connecting an  
external microphone equipped with a  
stereo mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the  
camera’s external microphone IN  
terminal (p.16). When an external  
microphone is connected, sound  
recording will switch automatically to the  
external microphone.  
Level meter  
[Sound rec.] options  
[Auto]  
: The sound recording level will be adjusted  
automatically. Auto level control will operate  
automatically in response to the sound level.  
[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound  
recording level to one of 64 levels.  
Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while  
turning the <5> dial to adjust the sound recording  
level. While looking at the peak hold indicator  
(Approx. 3 sec.), adjust so that the level meter  
sometimes lights up the “12” (-12 dB) mark on the  
right for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0,” the  
sound will be distorted.  
[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.  
184  
3Menu Function Settings  
[Wind filter]  
If [Enable] is set, outdoor wind noise entering the microphone will  
be reduced. Note that, some low-tone noise might also be  
reduced. When shooting in places where there is no wind, set this  
to [Disable] for a more natural sound recording.  
  The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be  
adjusted.  
 
The 48 kHz sampling frequency will be 16-bit recordings for both L and R.  
  Silent shooting  
This function applies to still photo shooting (p.159).  
  Metering timer  
You can change how long the exposure setting is to be displayed  
(AE lock time) when the <A> is pressed.  
  Grid display  
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines.  
185  
3Menu Function Settings  
[Z] Menu  
  Exposure compensation  
Although exposure compensation can be set up to ±5 stops,  
exposure compensation for movies can be set only up to ±3 stops.  
For still photos, exposure compensation can be set up to ±5 stops.  
  Auto Lighting Optimizer  
The Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set as explained on page 101. It  
will be applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during  
movie shooting.  
If the [n] menu tab’s [kHighlight tone priority] is set to  
[Enable], the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to  
[Disable] and cannot be changed.  
  Picture Style  
The Picture Style can be set as explained on pages 90-95. It will be  
applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during movie  
shooting.  
  White balance  
The white balance can be set as explained on pages 96-98. It will be  
applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during movie  
shooting.  
  Custom White Balance  
As explained on page 97, the image for custom white balance can  
be selected.  
186  
Notes on Movie Shooting  
Recording and Image Quality  
  If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer, the Image Stabilizer will  
operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway.  
The Image Stabilizer will thereby consume battery power and may  
shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible  
shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, you  
should set the IS switch to <2>.  
  The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up camera operation  
noise. If you use a commercially-available external microphone, you can  
prevent (or reduce) these noises from being recorded.  
  Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the  
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.  
  Autofocusing during movie shooting is not recommended since it might  
momentarily throw the focus way off or change the exposure. Even if the  
AF mode has been set to [Quick mode], it will switch to the Live mode  
during movie shooting.  
  If movie shooting is not possible due to insufficient remaining capacity of  
the card, the movie recording size and movie shooting remaining time  
(p.176) will be displayed in red.  
  If you use a card having a slow writing speed, a five-level  
indicator might appear on the right of the screen during  
movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been  
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer  
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will  
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting  
will stop automatically.  
Indicator  
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either  
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.  
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.  
If you take still photos during movie shooting, the movie shooting might  
stop. Setting a low image-recording quality for still images might resolve  
this problem.  
187  
Notes on Movie Shooting  
Playback and TV connection  
  If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, that part  
might look momentarily still when you playback the movie. In such cases,  
shoot movies with manual exposure.  
  If you connect the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.209) and  
shoot a movie in [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the movie being shot will  
be displayed at a small size on the TV. However, the actual movie will be  
properly recorded at the movie recording size that was set.  
  If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.209, 212) and shoot a movie,  
the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the  
sound will be properly recorded.  
188  
9
Image Playback  
This chapter explains how to playback and erase  
photos and movies, how to display images on a TV  
screen, and other playback-related functions.  
About images taken with another camera:  
The camera might not be able to properly display images captured  
with a different camera or edited with a computer or whose file name  
was changed.  
189  
xImage Playback  
Single Image Display  
1
Playback the image.  
  Press the <x> button.  
X The last captured image or last image  
viewed will appear.  
Select the image.  
2
 
To playback images starting with the last  
image, turn the < > dial counterclockwise.  
5
To playback images starting with the first  
captured image, turn the dial clockwise.  
  Each time you press the <B>  
button, the display format will change.  
No information  
With basic information  
With detailed information  
Histogram  
Exit the image playback.  
3
  Press the <x> button to exit the  
image playback and return to  
shooting-ready state.  
190  
B Shooting Information Display  
Sample of Image Taken in a Creative Zone Mode  
Exposure compensation amount  
Protect  
Rating  
Folder number - File number  
Flash exposure  
compensation amount  
Aperture  
Histogram  
(Brightness/RGB)  
Shutter speed  
Picture Style/Settings  
Metering mode  
Shooting mode  
ISO speed  
Highlight tone priority  
White balance  
Image-recording  
quality  
Color space  
Shooting date and time  
Image verification data  
appended  
Playback number/  
Total images recorded  
White balance correction  
Color temperature  
when <P> is set  
File size  
Eye-Fi card  
transmission status  
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the JPEG image file size will be  
displayed.  
* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.  
* For RAW images processed with the camera and images applied with Creative  
filters, the <1+> icon changes to < >.  
191  
B Shooting Information Display  
Sample of Image Taken in a Basic Zone Mode  
Shooting mode  
Ambience and  
ambience effects  
Lighting or scene  
* For images taken in Basic Zone modes, the information displayed may differ  
depending on the shooting mode.  
Sample of Movie Taken in Movie Mode  
Shooting time  
Playback  
Shutter speed and  
aperture for movie  
shooting  
Movie shooting  
mode  
Movie file size  
Recording  
system  
Movie recording size  
Frame rate  
  About the Highlight Alert  
When the [4 Highlight alert] menu option is set to [Enable],  
overexposed highlight areas will blink. To obtain more image detail in  
the overexposed areas, set the exposure compensation to a  
negative amount and shoot again.  
192  
B Shooting Information Display  
  About the AF Point Display  
When the [4 AF point disp.] menu option is set to [Enable], the AF  
point which achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF  
point selection was used, multiple AF points may be displayed in red.  
  About the Histogram  
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and  
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color  
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with the [4  
Histogram] menu option.  
[Brightness] Display  
Sample Histograms  
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of  
the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis  
indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and  
brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates  
how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The  
more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the  
image. And the more pixels there are toward the right,  
the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on  
the left, the shadow detail will be lost. And if there are  
too many pixels on the right, the highlight detail will  
be lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced.  
By checking the image and its brightness histogram,  
Dark image  
Normal brightness  
Bright image  
you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.  
[RGB] Display  
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color’s  
brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal  
axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left and brighter  
on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for  
each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the  
darker and less prominent the color. And the more pixels there are toward  
the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on  
the left, the respective color information will be lacking. And if there are too  
many pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no detail. By  
checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation  
and gradation condition and white balance inclination.  
193  
xSearching for Images Quickly  
H
Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index display)  
Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine  
images on one screen.  
Switch to the index display.  
1
  During image playback, press the  
<I> button.  
X The 4-image index display will  
appear. The currently-selected image  
will be highlighted in a blue frame.  
  Press the <I> button again to  
switch to the 9-image index display.  
Pressing the <u> button will switch  
the display from 9 images, 4 images,  
to a single image displayed.  
Î
Î
Select the image.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to move the blue  
frame to select the image. You can  
also press the <V> or <U> key to  
select the image.  
  Turn the <6> dial to see the next  
screen of index images.  
  Press <0> and the selected image  
will be displayed as a single image.  
194  
xSearching for Images Quickly  
I Jump through Images (Jump display)  
With the single image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through  
the images.  
Select the jump method.  
1
  In the [4 Image jump w/6] menu,  
select the jump method, then press  
<0>.  
d: Display images one by one  
e: Jump 10 images  
f: Jump 100 images  
g: Display by date  
h: Display by folder  
i: Display movies only  
j: Display stills only  
k:  
Display by image rating (p.198)  
Turn the <6> dial to select the  
rating.  
Browse by jumping.  
  Press the <x> button to playback  
images.  
2
  On the single-image display, turn the  
<6> dial.  
X
The jump display will proceed  
according to the selected jump method.  
Jump method  
Playback position  
  To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date]. Turn the  
<6> dial to display the shooting date.  
  To search images according to folder, select [Folder].  
  If the card contains both [Movies] and [Stills], select either one to  
display only movies or stills.  
  If no images match the selected [Rating], browsing through the images  
with <6> is not possible.  
195  
u/y Magnified View  
You can magnify a shot image by 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor.  
Magnify the image.  
  During image playback, press the  
1
<u> button.  
X The image will be magnified.  
  If you hold down the <u> button, the  
image will be magnified until it  
reaches the maximum magnification.  
  Press the <I> button to reduce  
the magnification. If you hold down  
the button, the magnification will be  
reduced to the single image display.  
Magnified area position  
Scroll around the image.  
2
  Use <9> to scroll around the  
magnified image.  
  To exit the magnified display, press  
the <x> button and the single  
image display will return.  
  You can turn the <5> dial to view another image while the magnification  
is maintained.  
  Magnified view is not possible during the image review immediately after  
the image is taken.  
  A movie cannot be magnified.  
196  
b Rotating the Image  
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.  
Select [Rotate].  
  Under the [3] tab, select [Rotate],  
1
then press <0>.  
Select the image.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be rotated.  
  You can also select an image on the  
index display.  
Rotate the image.  
3
  Each time you press <0>, the  
image will rotate clockwise as follows:  
90° 270° 0°  
  To rotate another image, repeat steps  
2 and 3.  
  To exit and return to the menu, press  
the <M> button.  
  If you have set [5 Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.218) before taking  
vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.  
  If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during  
image playback, set the [5 Auto rotate] menu option to [OnzD].  
  A movie cannot be rotated.  
197  
3Setting Ratings  
With the [4 Rating] menu, you can give one of five ratings (l, m,  
n, o, p) to images and movies.  
Select [Rating].  
  Select the [4 Rating] menu, then  
1
press <0>.  
Select an image or movie.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image or movie to be rated.  
  You can display three images by  
pressing the <I> button. To  
return to the single-image display,  
press the <u> button.  
Rate the image or movie.  
3
  Press the <V> key to select a rating  
mark.  
X The total number of images and  
movies rated will be counted for each  
rating.  
  To rate another image or movie,  
repeat steps 2 and 3.  
  To exit and return to the menu, press  
the <M> button.  
198  
3Setting Ratings  
The number of images and movies for each rating will be counted up to 3  
digits (999). If rated images reaches 1000 or higher, [###] will be displayed.  
Taking advantage of ratings  
  With the [4 Image jump w/6] menu, you can display only the rated  
images and movies.  
  With the [4 Slide show] menu, you can playback only the rated images  
and movies.  
  With the provided software, you can select only the rated images and  
movies.  
  With Windows Vista and Windows 7, you can check the rating with the  
file information display or the provided image viewer.  
199  
QQuick Control During Playback  
When you press the <Q> button during playback, you can set the  
following: [3 Protect Images, 3 Rotate, 4 Rating, 3 Creative  
filters, 3 Resize (JPEG images only), 4 Highlight alert, 4 AF point  
display, and 4 Image jump w/6]. For movies, only the functions in  
bold above can be set.  
Press the <Q> button.  
1
  During image playback, press the  
<Q> button.  
X The Quick Control screen will appear.  
Select a function and set it.  
2
  Press the <V> key to select a  
function.  
X The name and current setting of the  
selected function are displayed at the  
bottom.  
  Press the <U> key to set the  
function.  
  For Creative filters and Resize, press  
<0> and set the function. For  
details, see page 220 for Creative  
filters and page 222 for Resize. To  
cancel, press the <M> button.  
Exit the setting.  
  Press the <Q> button to turn off the  
3
Quick Control screen.  
200  
QQuick Control During Playback  
To rotate an image, set the [5 Auto rotate] menu to [OnzD]. If it is set to  
any other setting, the image will not rotate.  
  If you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the JPEG image will be  
displayed.  
  Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the  
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing  
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.  
  Regarding images not taken with the EOS 60D, selectable functions may  
be limited.  
201  
kEnjoying Movies  
Basically, you can playback movies in the following three ways:  
Playback on a TV set  
(p.209, 212)  
Use the provided AV cable or an HDMI  
Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) to  
connect the camera to a TV set. Then  
you can playback the captured movies  
and photos on the TV.  
If you have a High-Definition TV set and  
connect your camera with an HDMI  
cable, you can watch Full HD (Full High-  
Definition: 1920x1080) and HD (High-  
Definition: 1280x720) movies with higher  
image quality.  
  Movies on a card can be played only by devices compatible with MOV  
files.  
  Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera  
cannot be connected with an HDMI cable.  
  Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB  
cable, movies and photos cannot be played nor saved.  
202  
kEnjoying Movies  
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor  
(p.204-208)  
You can playback movies on the  
camera’s LCD monitor and even edit out  
the first and last scenes. You can also  
playback the photos and movies  
recorded in the card as an automatic  
slide show.  
A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and  
played back with the camera.  
Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer  
(See the PDF file instruction manual for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser)  
The movie files recorded in the card can  
be transferred to a personal computer  
and played or edited with ZoomBrowser  
EX/ImageBrowser (provided software).  
You can also extract a single frame from  
a movie and save it as a still photo.  
  To have the movie playback smoothly on a personal computer, the  
personal computer must be a high-performance model. Regarding the  
hardware requirements for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser, see the  
PDF file instruction manual.  
  If you want to use commercially-available software to playback or edit the  
movies, be sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on  
commercially-available software, inquire the software maker.  
203  
kPlaying Movies  
Playback the image.  
  Press the <x> button to display the  
1
images.  
Select a movie.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
movie to be played.  
2
  With the single-image display, the  
<1s> icon displayed on the  
upper left indicates that it is a movie.  
 
On the index display, the perforation on  
the left edge of the image indicates that it  
is a movie. As movies cannot be played  
on the index display, press <  
0> to  
switch to the single-image display.  
On the single-image display, press <  
X The movie playback panel will appear  
0>.  
3
on the bottom.  
Playback the movie.  
4
  Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.  
X The movie will start playing.  
  You can pause the movie playback by  
pressing <0>.  
  During movie playback, you can  
adjust the sound volume by turning  
the <6> dial.  
Speaker  
  For more details on the playback  
procedure, see the next page.  
204  
kPlaying Movies  
Function  
2Exit  
Playback Description  
Returns to the single-image display.  
7Play  
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.  
Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <U> key.  
The slow-motion speed is indicated on the upper right.  
8Slow motion  
5First frame  
3Previous frame  
Displays the movie’s first frame.  
Each time you press <0>, a single previous frame is  
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.  
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-  
frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the  
movie.  
6Next frame  
4Last frame  
Displays the movie’s last frame.  
Displays the editing screen (p.206).  
Playback position  
XEdit  
mm’ ss”  
Playback time  
You can adjust the built-in speaker’s (p.204) sound volume  
by turning the <6> dial.  
Volume  
  With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, the continuous playback time  
will be approx. 4 hours at 23°C/73°F.  
  During the single-image display, press the <B> button to switch the  
shooting information display (p.266).  
  If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be  
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.  
  If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.209, 212) to playback a movie,  
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not  
adjust the sound volume.)  
205  
X
Editing the Movie’s First and Last Scenes  
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1-sec. increments.  
On the movie playback screen,  
select [X].  
X The editing screen will be displayed.  
1
Specify the part to be edited out.  
2
  Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or  
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.  
 
Press the <  
the < > dial (next frame) to specify the  
part to be edited out, then press < >.  
After deciding which part to edit out, press  
>. The portion highlighted in blue on  
the top of the screen is what will remain.  
U> key to fast forward or turn  
5
0
 
<
0
Check the edited movie.  
3
 
Select [7] and press <0> to playback  
the portion highlighted in blue.  
 
To change the editing, go back to step 2.  
  To cancel the editing, select [2] and  
press <0>.  
Save the movie.  
4
  Select [W], then press <0>.  
X The save screen will appear.  
  To save it as a new movie, select  
[New file]. To save it and overwrite  
the original movie file, select  
[Overwrite]. Then press <0>.  
  Since the editing is done in 1-sec. increments (position indicated by  
[X]), the exact position where the movie is edited may differ slightly from  
the position you specified.  
  If the card does not have enough room, [New file] will not be selectable.  
  More movie editing functions are available with ZoomBrowser EX/  
ImageBrowser (provided software).  
206  
3Slide Show (Auto Playback)  
You can playback the images in the card as an automatic slide show.  
Select [Slide show].  
1
  Under the [4] tab, select [Slide  
show], then press <0>.  
Select the images to be played.  
  Press the <V> key to select the  
Number of images to be played  
2
desired option, then press <0>.  
[All images/Movies/Stills]  
  Press the <V> key to select one of  
the following: [jAll images/  
kMovies/zStills]. Then press  
<0>.  
[Date/Folder/Rating]  
  Press the <V> key to select one of  
the following: [iDate/nFolder/  
Rating].  
  When <zH> is highlighted,  
press the <B> button.  
  Press the <V> key to select the  
desired option, then press <0>.  
Item  
Playback Description  
jAll images All the still photos and movies in the card will be played back.  
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will  
be played back.  
iDate  
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played  
back.  
nFolder  
kMovies  
Only the movies in the card will be played back.  
Only the still photos in the card will be played back.  
zStills  
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will be  
played back.  
9Rating  
207  
3Slide Show (Auto Playback)  
Set [Set up] as desired.  
  Press the <V> key to select [Set  
3
up], then press <0>.  
 
Set the [Display time] (still photos),  
[Repeat], and [Transition effect  
]
options, then press the <M> button.  
[Display time]  
[Repeat]  
[Transition effect]  
Start the slide show.  
  Press the <V> key to select [Start],  
then press <0>.  
X After [Loading image...] is displayed,  
the slide show will start.  
4
5
Quit the slide show.  
 
To quit the slide show and return to the  
setting screen, press the < > button.  
M
  To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be  
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume  
the slide show.  
  During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the  
still photo display format.  
  During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the  
<6>.  
  During pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view another image.  
  During the slide show, auto power off will not take effect.  
  The display time may vary depending on the image.  
  To view the slide show on a TV set, see pages 209-212.  
208  
Viewing the Images on TV  
You can also view the still photos and movies on a TV set. Before  
connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and  
television, turn off the camera and television.  
* Adjust the movie’s sound volume with the TV set.  
* Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed might be cut off.  
Viewing on HD (High-Definition) TV Sets  
The HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.  
Connect the HDMI cable to the  
camera.  
  With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo  
facing the back of the camera, insert  
it into the <D> terminal.  
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV  
2 set.  
  Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s  
HDMI IN port.  
Turn on the TV and switch the  
3 TV’s video input to select the  
connected port.  
Set the camera’s power switch to  
4 <1>.  
209  
Viewing the Images on TV  
Press the <x> button.  
5
X The image will appear on the TV  
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on  
the camera’s LCD monitor.)  
  The images will be displayed at the  
TV’s optimum resolution  
automatically.  
  By pressing the <B> button, you  
can change the display format.  
  To playback movies, see page 204.  
  Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>  
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.  
  Some TVs might not be able to display the captured images. In such a  
case, use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV.  
  The camera’s <q> terminal and <D> terminal cannot  
be used at the same time.  
210  
Viewing the Images on TV  
For HDMI CEC TV sets  
When a TV set compatible with HDMI CEC* is connected to the camera with the  
HDMI cable, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback operations.  
* An HDMI-standard function enabling you to control multiple HDMI devices with one remote control unit.  
Select [Ctrl over HDMI].  
1
  Under the [4] tab, select [Ctrl over  
HDMI], then press <0>. Select  
[Enable], then press <0>.  
X
When the camera is connected to a TV  
set, the TV set’s input will automatically  
switch to the HDMI port connected to the  
camera. When you press the camera’s  
<x  
> button, you can use the TV set’s  
remote control for playback operations.  
Select an image or movie.  
Still photo playback menu  
Movie playback menu  
2
 
Point the remote control to the TV set and  
press the button to select the image.  
/  
Then press the Enter button.  
X
The menu will appear. The menu displayed  
will differ for still photos and movies.  
: Return  
: 9-image index  
: Slide show  
: Disp. shooting info  
: Rotate  
: Play movie  
 
Press the  
option, then press the Enter button.  
/
button to select the desired  
X For a slide show, press the remote  
control’s /button to select an  
option, then press the Enter button.  
If you select [Return] and press the Enter  
 
button, the menu will disappear and you can  
use the  
/ꢁ  
button to select an image.  
  Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For  
details, see the TV set’s instruction manual.  
 
Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not operate properly.  
In such a case, disconnect the HDMI cable, set the camera’s [4 Ctrl over  
HDMI] menu to [Disable], and use the camera to control the playback operation.  
211  
Viewing the Images on TV  
Viewing on Non-HD (High-Definition) TV Sets  
Connect the provided AV cable to  
the camera.  
  With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing  
the front of the camera, insert it into  
the <q> terminal.  
1
Connect the AV cable to the TV  
(Red)  
2 set.  
(White)  
  Connect the AV cable to the TV’s  
video IN terminal and audio IN  
terminal.  
(Yellow)  
Turn on the TV and switch the  
3 TV’s video input to select the  
connected port.  
Set the camera’s power switch to  
4 <1>.  
Press the <x> button.  
X The image will appear on the TV  
5
screen (Nothing will be displayed on  
the camera’s LCD monitor).  
  To playback movies, see page 204.  
  Do not use any AV cable other than the one provided. Images might not  
be displayed if you use a different cable.  
  If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the images will not  
be displayed properly. Set the proper video system format with the [6  
Video system] menu option.  
212  
K Protecting Images  
Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.  
Select [Protect images].  
1
  Under the [3] tab, select [Protect  
images], then press <0>.  
X The protect setting screen will  
appear.  
Select the image and protect it.  
2
  Select [Select images], then press  
<0>.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be protected, then press  
<0>.  
X When an image is protected, the  
<K> icon will appear on the top of  
the screen.  
Image protect icon  
  To cancel the image protection, press  
<0> again. The <K> icon will  
disappear.  
  To protect another image, repeat step  
2.  
  To exit the image protection, press  
the <M> button. The menu will  
reappear.  
213  
K Protecting Images  
3Protecting All Images in a Folder or Card  
You can protect all the images in a folder or card at one time.  
When the [3 Protect images] menu  
option is set to [All images in folder] or  
[All images on card], all the images in  
the folder or card will be protected.  
To cancel the image protection, select  
[Unprotect all images in folder] or  
[Unprotect all images on card].  
If you format the card (p.48), the protected images will also be erased.  
  Movies can also be protected.  
 
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase  
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.  
  If you erase all the images (p.216), only the protected images will  
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images  
all at once.  
214  
LErasing Images  
You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in  
one batch. Protected images (p.213) will not be erased.  
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure  
you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent  
important images from being erased accidentally, protect  
them. Erasing a RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW  
and JPEG images.  
Erasing a Single Image  
Playback the image to be erased.  
1
Press the <L> button.  
2
X The erase dialog will appear at the  
bottom of the screen.  
Erase the image.  
  Select [Erase], then press <0>. The  
3
image displayed will be erased.  
3Checkmarking <X> Images to be Erased in a Batch  
By checkmarking the images to be erased, you can erase multiple  
images at one time.  
Select [Erase images].  
1
  Under the [3] tab, select [Erase  
images], then press <0>.  
215  
LErasing Images  
Select [Select and erase images].  
  Select [Select and erase images],  
then press <0>.  
X The images will be displayed.  
  To display the three-image display,  
press the <I> button. To return  
to the single-image display, press the  
<u> button.  
2
3
4
Select the images to be erased.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be erased, then press the  
<V> key.  
X A <X> checkmark will be displayed  
on the upper left.  
  To select other images to be erased,  
repeat step 3.  
Erase the images.  
  Press the <L> button.  
  Select [OK], then press <0>.  
X The selected images will be erased.  
3Erasing All Images in a Folder or Card  
You can erase all the images in a folder or card at once. When the [3  
Erase images] menu option is set to [All images in folder] or [All  
images on card], all the images in the folder or card will be erased.  
To also erase protected images, format the card (p.48).  
216  
Changing Image Playback Settings  
3Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness  
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to  
read.  
Select [LCD brightness].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [LCD  
brightness], then press <0>.  
Adjust the brightness.  
2
  While referring to the gray chart,  
press the <U> key to adjust the  
brightness, then press <0>.  
To check the image’s exposure, looking at the histogram is recommended  
(p.193).  
217  
Changing Image Playback Settings  
3Auto Rotation of Vertical Images  
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they  
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD  
monitor and computer instead of horizontally. The  
setting of this feature can be changed.  
Select [Auto rotate].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [Auto  
rotate], then press <0>.  
Set the auto rotation.  
2
  Select the desired setting, then press  
<0>.  
  OnzD  
The vertical image is automatically rotated on both the camera’s  
LCD monitor and on the personal computer.  
  OnD  
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the personal  
computer.  
  Off  
The vertical image is not rotated.  
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation  
was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.  
  Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be  
automatically rotated for the image review.  
  If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the  
image might not be rotated automatically for playback.  
  If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal  
computer screen, it means the software you are using is unable to rotate  
the image. Using the provided software is recommended.  
218  
10  
Post-Processing  
Images  
After shooting images, you can apply Creative filters or  
resize the image (downsize the pixel count). You can  
also process RAW images with the camera.  
  It may not be possible to process images shot with a camera  
other than the EOS 60D.  
  Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be  
done while the camera is connected to a personal computer  
via the <C> terminal.  
219  
Creative Filters  
You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a  
new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Toy camera effect, and Miniature  
effect. Creative filters cannot be applied to 41 and 61 images.  
Select [Creative filters].  
1
  Select the [3 Creative filters] menu  
option, then press <0>.  
X Images will be displayed.  
Select an image.  
  Select the image you want to apply a  
2
filter to.  
  By pressing the <I> button, you  
can switch to the index display and  
select an image.  
Select a filter.  
  When you press <0>, the filters will  
3
be displayed.  
  Press the <U> key to select a filter,  
then press <0>.  
X The image applied with the respective  
filter will be displayed.  
Adjust the filter effect.  
4
  Press the <U> key to adjust the  
filter effect, then press <0>. For the  
miniature effect, press the <V> key  
and select the image area (within the  
white frame) where you want it to look  
sharp. Then press <0>.  
220  
Creative Filters  
Save the image.  
5
  Select [OK] to save the image.  
  Note the destination folder and image  
file number, then select [OK].  
  To apply a filter to another image,  
repeat steps 2 to 5.  
  To exit and return to the menu, press  
the <M> button.  
  With 1+JPEG images, the 1 image will be applied with the Creative  
filter and saved as a JPEG image.  
  With 41+JPEG and 61+JPEG images, the Creative filter will be  
applied to the JPEG image.  
Creative Filter Features  
 
Grainy B/W  
Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the  
contrast, you can change the black-and-white effect.  
 
 
Soft focus  
Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change  
the degree of softness.  
Toy camera effect  
Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image’s  
fours corners. By adjusting the color tone, you can change the color  
cast.  
 
Miniature effect  
Creates a diorama effect. In step 4, you can press the <B>  
button to change the orientation (vertical/horizontal) of the white  
frame that shows where you want the image to look sharp.  
221  
S Resize  
You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a  
new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/b  
images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.  
Select [Resize].  
  Select the [3 Resize] menu option,  
1
then press <0>.  
X Images will be displayed.  
Select an image.  
  Select the image you want to resize.  
  By pressing the <I> button, you  
can switch to the index display and  
select an image.  
2
Select the desired image size.  
3
  Press <0> to display the image  
sizes.  
  Press the <U> key to select the  
desired image size, then press <0>.  
Target sizes  
Save the image.  
4
  Select [OK] to save the image.  
  Note the destination folder and image  
file number, then select [OK].  
  To resize another image, repeat steps  
2 to 4.  
  To exit and return to the menu, press  
the <M> button.  
222  
S Resize  
Resize Options According to Original Image Size  
Available Resize Settings  
Original Image Size  
4
a
k
k
b
k
k
k
c
k
k
k
k
3
4
k
a
b
c
About Image Sizes  
The [8.0M 3456x2304] image size displayed in step 3 has a 3:2 aspect  
ratio. The image size according to aspect ratios is shown in the table  
below. For asterisked image-recording quality, the pixel count does not  
exactly match the aspect ratio. The image will be slightly cropped.  
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count  
Quality  
3:2  
4:3  
16:9  
1:1  
3456x2304  
3072x2304  
3456x1944  
2304x2304  
4
a
(8.0 megapixels) (7.0 megapixels) (6.7 megapixels) (5.3 megapixels)  
2592x1728 2304x1728 2592x1456* 1728x1728  
(4.5 megapixels) (4.0 megapixels) (3.8 megapixels) (3.0 megapixels)  
1920x1280 1696x1280* 1920x1080 1280x1280  
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)  
720x480 640x480 720x400* 480x480  
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)  
b
c
223  
R
Processing RAW Images with the CameraN  
You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG  
images. While the RAW image itself does not change, you can process  
the RAW image according to different conditions to create any number  
of JPEG images from it.  
Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the  
camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (provided software) to process  
those images.  
Select [RAW image processing].  
  Select the [3 RAW image  
1
processing] menu option, then press  
<0>.  
X 1 images will be displayed.  
Select an image.  
2
  Select the image you want to  
process.  
  By pressing the <I> button, you  
can switch to the index display and  
select an image.  
Process the image.  
3
  Press <0> and soon the RAW-  
processing options will appear  
(p.226, 227).  
  Press the <V> <U> key to select  
an option, and turn the <5> dial to  
change the setting.  
X The displayed image will reflect  
“Brightness,” “White balance,” and  
the others settings adjustment.  
  To return to the image settings at the  
time of shooting, press the <B>  
button.  
224  
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN  
Displaying the setting screen  
  Press <0> to display the setting  
screen. Turn the <6> or <5> dial  
to change the setting. To return to the  
screen in step 3, press <0>.  
Save the image.  
4
  Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.  
  Select [OK] to save the image.  
  Note the destination folder and image  
file number, then press [OK].  
X The screen in step 2 will reappear.  
  To process another image, repeat  
steps 2 to 4.  
  To exit and return to the menu, press  
the <M> button.  
About the Magnified Display  
Pressing the <u> button in step 3 will magnify the image. The  
magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of [Quality] set in  
[RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the  
magnified image. When [  
Magnify] is grayed out during the image  
processing, the image cannot be magnified.  
While the image is magnified, pressing the <I> button will exit the  
magnified view.  
Images with Aspect Ratio Setting  
Images shot in a Live View shooting aspect ratio ([4:3] [16:9] [1:1]) will  
be displayed in the respective aspect ratio. JPEG images will also be  
saved in the set aspect ratio.  
225  
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN  
RAW Image-processing Options  
 
Brightness  
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop  
increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.  
 
White balance (p.96)  
You can select the white balance. If you select [P], use the <6>  
dial to set the color temperature. The displayed image will reflect the  
setting’s effect.  
 
Picture Style (p.90)  
You can select the Picture Style. To set the parameters such as  
Sharpness, press <0> to display the setting screen. Turn the <5>  
dial to select a parameter, then turn the <6> dial to set it as  
desired. Press <0> to finalize the setting and to return to the  
setting screen. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.  
 
 
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.101)  
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will  
reflect the setting’s effect.  
High ISO speed noise reduction (p.254)  
You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds. The displayed  
image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult to discern,  
press the <u> button to magnify the image. (Press the <I>  
button to return to the normal view.)  
To check the effect of the [Strong] setting, magnify the image.  
Viewing it as a single image will only display the [Standard] effect  
even if [Strong] was set.  
 
Image-recording quality (p.84)  
You can set the pixel count and image quality of the JPEG image to  
be saved when converting the RAW image. The image size  
displayed, such as [8.0M 3456x2304], has a 3:2 aspect ratio. The  
pixel count of each aspect ratio is indicated on page 223.  
226  
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN  
 
 
Color space (p.110)  
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD  
monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the image will not look  
very different when either color space is set.  
Peripheral illumination correction (p.102)  
You can set [Enable] or [Disable]. If [Enable] is set, the corrected  
image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, press the  
<u> button to magnify the image and look at the image corners.  
(Press the <I> button to return to the normal view.)  
 
Distortion correction  
When [Enable] is set, image distortion caused by the lens is  
corrected. If [Enable] is set, the distortion-corrected image will be  
displayed. The correction will have the image periphery to be  
cropped. Therefore, the image will look slightly larger (It is not a  
magnified image). With Digital Photo Professional (provided  
software), you can correct the image distortion while minimizing the  
trimming of the image periphery.  
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, use the Picture  
Style’s Sharpness setting to make adjustments as necessary.  
227  
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN  
 
Chromatic aberration correction  
When [Enable] is set, lateral chromatic aberration caused by the  
lens is corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be  
displayed. (The image periphery will also be slightly cropped.) If the  
effect is difficult to discern, press the <u> button to magnify the  
image. (Press the <I> button to return to the normal view.) The  
chromatic aberration correction done with the camera will be less  
pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional (provided  
software). Therefore the correction might not be so noticeable. In  
such a case, use Digital Photo Professional to correct the chromatic  
aberration. Chromatic aberration refers to the inaccurate  
convergence of colors along the fringes of a subject.  
  The result of RAW image processed in the camera and RAW image  
processed with Digital Photo Professional does not match exactly.  
  Even if image verification data (p.260) is appended to the RAW image,  
the image verification data is not appended to the JPEG image after  
processing.  
About peripheral illumination correction, distortion  
correction, and chromatic aberration correction  
To execute peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and  
chromatic aberration correction with the camera, the data of the lens used  
for the shot must be registered in the camera. If the lens data has not been  
registered in the camera, use EOS Utility (provided software) to register the  
lens data.  
228  
11  
Sensor Cleaning  
The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit attached  
to the image sensor’s front layer (low-pass filter) to  
shake off dust automatically.  
The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the  
image so that the dust spots remaining can be erased  
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (provided  
software).  
About smudges adhering to the front of the sensor  
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant  
from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor.  
In case visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning,  
having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.  
Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can  
press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start  
shooting immediately.  
229  
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning  
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self  
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on  
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this  
operation. However, you can execute the sensor cleaning at anytime as  
well as disable it.  
Cleaning the Sensor Now  
Select [Sensor cleaning].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [Sensor  
cleaning], then press <0>.  
Select [Clean nowf].  
2
  Select [Clean nowf], then press  
<0>.  
  Select [OK] on the dialog screen,  
then press <0>.  
X The screen will indicate that the  
sensor is being cleaned. Although  
there will be a shutter sound, a  
picture is not taken.  
  For best results, do the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is  
placed on a table or other flat surface.  
  Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve that  
much. Right after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]  
option will remain disabled temporarily.  
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning  
  In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].  
X The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the  
power switch to <1> or <2>.  
230  
3Appending Dust Delete DataN  
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust  
that might be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust  
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for  
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital  
Photo Professional (provided software) to erase the dust spots  
automatically.  
Preparation  
  Get a solid-white object (paper, etc.).  
  Set the lens focal length to 50mm or longer.  
  Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity  
(). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens and  
turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.  
Obtain the Dust Delete Data  
Select [Dust Delete Data].  
1
  Under the [y] tab, select [Dust  
Delete Data], then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Select [OK] and press <0>. After  
2
the automatic self-cleaning of the  
sensor is performed, a message will  
appear. Although there will be a  
shutter sound, a picture is not taken.  
231  
3Appending Dust Delete DataN  
Photograph a solid-white object.  
3
  At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.  
- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a  
patternless, solid-white object and  
take a picture.  
X The picture will be taken in the  
aperture-priority AE mode with an  
aperture of f/22.  
  Since the image will not be saved, the  
data can still be obtained even if there  
is no card in the camera.  
X
When the picture is taken, the camera  
will start obtaining the Dust Delete  
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is  
obtained, a message will appear. Select  
[OK], and the menu will reappear.  
 
If the data was not obtained  
successfully, a message to that effect  
will appear. Follow the “Preparation”  
procedure on the preceding page, then  
select [OK]. Take the picture again.  
About the Dust Delete Data  
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG  
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, you  
should update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.  
To erase dust spots automatically with the provided software, see the  
PDF Software Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM.  
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly  
affects the image file size.  
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the  
paper has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and  
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software.  
232  
3Manual Sensor CleaningN  
Dust which could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can  
be removed manually with a blower, etc.  
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the  
sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon  
Service Center is recommended.  
Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.  
Select [Sensor cleaning].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [Sensor  
cleaning], then press <0>.  
Select [Clean manually].  
2
  Select [Clean manually], then press  
<0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Select [OK], then press <0>.  
X In a moment, the reflex mirror will  
lockup and the shutter will open.  
  CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.  
3
End the cleaning.  
4
  Set the power switch to <2>.  
  As power source, using the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) is  
recommended.  
  If you use a battery, make sure it is fully recharged. If the battery grip with  
size-AA/LR6 batteries is attached, manual sensor cleaning will not be  
possible.  
233  
3Manual Sensor CleaningN  
  While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. Doing any  
of the following will cut off the power and close the shutter. The  
shutter curtains and image sensor might get damaged.  
• Setting the power switch to <2>.  
• Opening the battery compartment cover.  
• Opening the card slot cover.  
  The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor  
with care.  
  Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the  
sensor.  
  Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If  
the power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or  
reflex mirror might get damaged.  
  Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force can  
damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.  
  If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the  
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.  
234  
12  
Printing Images  
  Printing (p.236)  
You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print  
out the images in the card. The camera is compatible with  
wPictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.  
  Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.245)  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print  
images recorded in the card according to your printing  
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,  
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the  
print order to a photofinisher.  
235  
Preparing to Print  
The direct printing procedure is done entirely with the camera  
while you look at the LCD monitor.  
Connecting the Camera to a Printer  
Set the camera’s power switch to  
<2>.  
1
Set up the printer.  
2
  For details, see the printer’s  
instruction manual.  
Connecting the camera to the  
3 printer.  
  Use the interface cable provided with  
the camera.  
  Connect the cable to the camera’s  
<C> terminal with the cable  
plug’s <D> icon facing the back of  
the camera.  
  To connect to the printer, refer to the  
printer’s instruction manual.  
Turn on the printer.  
4
Set the camera’s power switch to  
5 <1>.  
X Some printers may make a beeping  
sound.  
236  
Preparing to Print  
Playback the image.  
  Press the <x> button.  
X The image will appear, and the <w>  
icon will appear on the upper left to  
indicate that the camera is connected  
to a printer.  
wPictBridge  
6
  Movies cannot be printed.  
  The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct  
or Bubble Jet Direct.  
  Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.  
  If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the  
printer. Resolve the problem displayed by the error message (p.244).  
  You can also print RAW images taken with this camera. For printing in A4  
or Letter and larger paper sizes, using a JPEG 73 image processed  
from RAW (except 41 and 61) is recommended.  
  If you use a battery pack to power the camera, make sure it is fully  
charged. With a fully-charged battery, printing up to approx. 4 hours is  
possible.  
  Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold  
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.  
  For direct printing, using the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) to  
power the camera is recommended.  
237  
wPrinting  
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the  
printer. Some settings might not be available. For details, see the  
printer’s instruction manual.  
Printer-connected icon  
Select the image to be printed.  
  Check that the <w> icon is  
1
displayed on the upper left of the LCD  
monitor.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be printed.  
Press <0>.  
X The print setting screen will appear.  
2
Print setting screen  
Sets the printing effects (p.240).  
Sets the date or file number imprinting to on  
or off.  
Sets the quantity to be printed.  
Sets the trimming (cropping) (p.243).  
Sets the paper size, type, and layout.  
Returns to the screen in step 1.  
Starts the printing.  
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.  
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file  
number imprinting and trimming might not be available.  
Select [Paper settings].  
3
  Select [Paper settings], then press  
<0>.  
X The paper settings screen will  
appear.  
238  
wPrinting  
QSetting the Paper Size  
  Select the size of the paper loaded in  
the printer, then press <0>.  
X The paper type screen will appear.  
YSetting the Paper Type  
  Select the type of the paper loaded in  
the printer, then press <0>.  
X The page layout screen will appear.  
USetting the Page Layout  
  Select the page layout, then press  
<0>.  
X The print setting screen will reappear.  
Bordered  
The print will have white borders along the edges.  
The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print  
borderless prints, the print will have borders.  
Borderless  
The shooting information* will be imprinted on the border on  
9x13cm and larger prints.  
Borderedc  
xx-up  
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.  
On A4 or Letter size paper, 20 or 35 thumbnails of the images  
ordered through DPOF (p.245) will be printed.  
• [20-upc] will have the shooting information* imprinted.  
20-upc  
35-upp  
The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its  
settings.  
Default  
* From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,  
exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be imprinted.  
If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio,  
the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print. If  
the image is cropped, it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer  
number of pixels.  
239  
wPrinting  
Set the printing effects.  
4
  Set as necessary. If you need not set  
any printing effects, go to step 5.  
  What is displayed on the screen  
differs depending on the printer.  
  Select the option on the upper right  
(circled in the screenshot), then press  
<0>.  
  Select the desired printing effect, then  
press <0>.  
  If the <e> icon is displayed next to  
<z>, you can also adjust the  
printing effect (p.242).  
Printing Effect  
Description  
The image will be printed according to the printer’s standard  
colors. The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic  
corrections.  
EOn  
EOff  
No automatic correction will be applied.  
The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce  
more vivid blues and greens.  
EVIVID  
ENR  
Image noise is reduced before printing.  
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.  
0 B/W  
0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.  
0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.  
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No  
zNatural  
automatic color adjustments are applied.  
The printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural”  
zNatural M  
setting. However, this setting enables finer printing  
adjustments than with “Natural.”  
The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details,  
see the printer’s instruction manual.  
EDefault  
* When you change the printing effects, it is reflected in the image displayed on  
the upper left. Note that the printed image might look slightly different from the  
displayed image which is only an approximation. This also applies to  
[Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 242.  
240  
wPrinting  
Set the date and file number  
5 imprinting.  
  Set as necessary.  
  Select <I>, then press <0>.  
  Set as desired, then press <0>.  
Set the number of copies.  
  Set as necessary.  
  Select <R>, then press <0>.  
  Set the number of copies, then press  
<0>.  
6
Start printing.  
  Select [Print], then press <0>.  
7
  With Easy printing, you can print another image using the same settings.  
Just select the image and press the <l> button. With Easy printing, the  
number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number of  
copies.) Also, any trimming (p.243) will not be applied.  
  The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the  
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. See  
the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.  
  Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may  
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].  
  If image tilt correction (p.243) has been applied, it may take longer to  
print the image.  
  To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select  
[OK].  
  If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.51), all the settings will  
revert to the default.  
241  
wPrinting  
e Adjustment of Printing Effects  
In step 4 on page 240, select the printing  
effect. When the <e> icon is displayed  
brightly next to <z>, press the  
<B> button. You can then adjust the  
printing effect. What can be adjusted or  
what is displayed will depend on the  
selection made in step 4.  
  Brightness  
The image brightness can be adjusted.  
  Adjust levels  
When you select [Manual], you can change  
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the  
image’s brightness and contrast.  
With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press  
the <B> button to change the position of  
the <h>. Press the <U> key to freely adjust  
the shadow level (0 - 127) or highlight level  
(128 - 255).  
  kBrightener  
Effective in backlit conditions which can make the subject’s face look  
dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.  
  Red-eye corr.  
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]  
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.  
 
The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not show on the screen.  
  When you select [Detail set.], you can adjust the [Contrast],  
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color  
balance], use <9>. B is for blue, A is amber, M is magenta, and G is  
green. The color in the respective direction will be corrected.  
  If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to  
the default.  
242  
wPrinting  
Trimming the Image  
You can crop the image and print only  
Tilt correction  
the trimmed portion as if the image was  
recomposed. Do the trimming right  
before printing. If you set the trimming  
and then set the print settings, you may  
have to set the trimming again.  
1 On the print setting screen, select [Trimming].  
2 Set the trimming frame size, position, and aspect ratio.  
 
The image area within the trimming frame will be printed. The  
trimming frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].  
Changing the trimming frame size  
When you press the <u> or <I> button, the size of the  
trimming frame will change. The smaller the trimming frame, the  
larger the image magnification will be for printing.  
Moving the trimming frame  
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally.  
Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area.  
Rotating the frame  
Each time you press the <B> button, the trimming frame will  
switch between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables  
you to create a vertical-oriented print from a horizontal image.  
Image tilt correction  
By turning the <6> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to  
±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the  
image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.  
3 Press <0> to exit the trimming.  
X The print setting screen will reappear.  
  You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the  
print setting screen.  
243  
wPrinting  
  Depending on the printer, the trimmed image area might not be printed  
as you specified.  
  The smaller you make the trimming frame, the grainier the picture will  
look in the print.  
  While trimming the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look  
at the image on a TV screen, the trimming frame might not be displayed  
accurately.  
Handling Printer Errors  
If you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to  
resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to  
resume printing. For details on resuming the printing, see the printer’s  
instruction manual.  
Error Messages  
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the  
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the  
problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer  
to the printer’s instruction manual.  
Paper Error  
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.  
Ink Error  
Check the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.  
Hardware Error  
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.  
File Error  
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a  
different camera or images edited with a computer might not be printable.  
244  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file No. imprinting. The  
print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They cannot  
be set individually for each image.)  
Setting the Printing Options  
Select [Print order].  
1
  Under the [3] tab, select [Print  
order], then press <0>.  
Select [Set up].  
  Select [Set up], then press <0>.  
2
Set the option as desired.  
3
  Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File  
No.].  
  Select the option to be set, then press  
<0>. Select the desired setting,  
then press <0>.  
[Print type]  
[Date]  
[File No.]  
245  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
Standard Prints one image on one sheet.  
K
L
K
L
Index  
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet.  
Print type  
Both  
Prints both the standard and index prints.  
On  
Date  
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.  
Off  
On  
Off  
File number  
[On] imprints the file No. on the print.  
Exit the setting.  
4
  Press the <7> button.  
X The print order screen will reappear.  
  Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or  
[All image] to order the images to be  
printed.  
  Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file No. might not  
be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.  
  When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order  
specifications have been set. It will not work if you just extract images  
from the card and try to print them.  
  Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers might not be able  
to print the images as you specified. If this happens with your printer,  
refer to the printer’s instruction manual. Or check with your photofinisher  
about compatibility when ordering prints.  
  Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a  
different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may  
not work or may be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the  
print order may not be possible.  
  RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered.  
  With [Index] prints, both the [Date] and [File No.] cannot be set to [On]  
at the same time.  
246  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
Print Ordering  
  Sel.Image  
Select and order images one by one.  
To display the three-image display, press  
the <I> button. To return to the  
single-image display, press the <u>  
button.  
After completing the print order, press  
the <M> button to save the print order  
to the card.  
[Standard] [Both]  
Press the <V> key to set the number of  
copies to be printed for the displayed  
image.  
Quantity  
Total images selected  
[Index]  
Press the <V> key to checkmark the  
box <X> and the image will be included  
in the index print.  
Check mark  
Index icon  
  Byn  
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one  
copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear  
all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that folder will  
all be canceled.  
  All image  
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images in the  
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print  
order will be cleared for all the images in the card.  
  Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order  
even if you set “Byn” or “All image.”  
 
When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one print  
order. If you specify more than this, all the images might not be printed.  
247  
W Direct Printing with DPOF  
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily  
print images with DPOF.  
1 Prepare to print.  
  See page 236. Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer”  
procedure up to step 5.  
2 Under the [3] tab, select [Print order].  
3 Select [Print].  
  [Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to the  
printer and printing is possible.  
4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.238).  
  Set the printing effects (p.240) if necessary.  
5 Select [OK].  
  Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.  
  Certain printers cannot imprint the file No.  
  If [Bordered] is set, certain printers might imprint the date on the border.  
  Depending on the printer, the date might look light if it is imprinted on a  
bright background or on the border.  
  Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.  
  If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining  
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if you stop  
the printing and any of the following occurs:  
• Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted  
print-ordered images.  
• When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before  
resuming the printing.  
• When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.  
  If a problem occurs during printing, see page 244.  
248  
13  
Customizing the  
Camera  
With Custom Functions, you can change the camera  
functions to suit your preferences. Also, the current  
camera settings can be saved under the Mode Dial’s  
<w> position.  
The functions explained in this chapter will take effect  
only in the Creative Zone modes.  
249  
3Setting Custom FunctionsN  
Select [8].  
1
2
Select the group.  
  Select a Custom Function group (I to  
IV), then press <0>.  
Select the Custom Function No.  
Custom Function No.  
3
  Press the <U> key to select the  
number of the Custom Function to be  
set, then press <0>.  
Change the setting as desired.  
  Select the desired setting (number),  
then press <0>.  
4
  Repeat steps 2 to 4 if you want to set  
other Custom Functions.  
  At the bottom of the screen, the  
current Custom Function settings are  
indicated below the respective  
function numbers.  
Exit the setting.  
  Press the <M> button.  
X The screen in step 2 will reappear.  
5
Clearing All Custom Functions  
In step 2, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to clear all the  
Custom Function settings.  
Even if all the Custom Functions are cleared, the setting for [8C.Fn IV -4:  
Focusing Screen] will remain unchanged.  
250  
3Custom FunctionsN  
ALV  
shooting  
C.Fn I: Exposure  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Exposure level increments  
ISO speed setting increments  
ISO expansion  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
p.252  
p.253  
Bracketing auto cancel  
Bracketing sequence  
Safety shift  
Flash sync. speed in Av mode  
C.Fn II: Image  
1
2
3
Long exposure noise reduction  
k
k
k
p.254  
p.255  
High ISO speed noise reduction  
Highlight tone priority  
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive  
1
2
3
4
5
Lens drive when AF impossible  
AF point selection method  
Superimposed display  
AF-assist beam firing  
Mirror lockup  
k (f)  
p.255  
p.256  
p.257  
k (f)  
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others  
1
2
3
4
5
AF and metering buttons  
Assign SET button  
p.257  
p.258  
k
k (Except 5)  
k
Dial direction during Tv/Av  
Focusing Screen  
p.259  
p.260  
Add image verification data  
k
  The shaded Custom Functions do not take effect during Live View (LV)  
shooting. (Settings are disabled.)  
  Custom Functions do not apply to movie shooting.  
251  
3 Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn I: Exposure  
C.Fn I -1 Exposure level increments  
0: 1/3-stop  
1: 1/2-stop  
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure  
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. Effective when  
you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop  
increments.  
With setting 1, the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on  
the LCD panel as shown below.  
C.Fn I -2 ISO speed setting increments  
0: 1/3-stop  
1: 1-stop  
C.Fn I -3 ISO expansion  
0: Off  
1: On  
For the ISO speed, “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) will be selectable.  
Note that if [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable],  
H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) cannot be set.  
C.Fn I -4 Bracketing auto cancel  
0: On  
The AEB and WB-BKT settings will be canceled if you set the power  
switch to <2> or clear the camera settings. AEB will also be  
canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to the movie  
mode.  
1: Off  
The AEB and WB-BKT settings will not be canceled even if you set the  
power switch to <2>. (If the flash is ready to fire, AEB will be  
canceled temporarily, but the AEB amount will be retained.)  
252  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn I -5 Bracketing sequence  
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can  
be changed.  
0: 0, -, +  
1: -, 0, +  
WB Bracketing  
AEB  
B/A Direction  
M/G Direction  
0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance  
- : Decreased exposure - : Blue bias  
+ : Increased exposure + : Amber bias  
- : Magenta bias  
+ : Green bias  
C.Fn I -6 Safety shift  
0: Disable  
1: Enable (Tv/Av)  
This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperture-priority AE  
(f) modes. When the subject’s brightness changes erratically and the  
standard auto exposure cannot be obtained, the camera will change the  
exposure setting automatically to obtain a standard exposure.  
C.Fn I -7 Flash sync. speed in Av mode  
0: Auto  
Normally, the sync speed will be set automatically within 1/250 sec. to  
30 sec. to suit the subject brightness. High-speed sync can also take  
effect.  
1: 1/250-1/60 sec. auto  
When flash is used with aperture-priority AE (f), this prevents a slow  
flash-sync speed from being set automatically in low-light conditions. It  
is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. However,  
while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the background  
will come out dark.  
2: 1/250 sec. (fixed)  
The flash-sync speed is fixed to 1/250 sec. This more effectively  
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with setting 1. However,  
the background may come out darker than with setting 1.  
253  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn II: Image  
C.Fn II -1 Long exposure noise reduction  
0: Off  
1: Auto  
For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise reduction is performed  
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto]  
setting is effective in most cases.  
2: On  
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The  
[On] setting may be able to reduce noise which otherwise cannot be  
detected with the [Auto] setting.  
  With settings 1 and 2, after the picture is taken, the noise reduction  
process may take the same amount of time as the exposure. You cannot  
take another picture until the noise reduction process is completed.  
  At ISO 1600 and higher, noise might be more pronounced with setting 2  
than with setting 0 or 1.  
  With setting 2, if a long exposure is shot with the Live View displayed,  
BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process. The Live  
View display will not appear until the noise reduction is completed. (You  
cannot take another picture.)  
C.Fn II -2 High ISO speed noise reduction  
Reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is  
applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds. At  
low ISO speeds, the noise in the shadow areas is further reduced. Change  
the setting to suit the noise level.  
0: Standard  
1: Low  
2: Strong  
3: Disable  
  With setting 2, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly  
decrease.  
  If you playback a RAW or RAW+JPEG image with the camera or print an  
image directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look  
minimal. You can check the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced  
images with Digital Photo Professional (provided software).  
254  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn II -3 Highlight tone priority  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the  
standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays  
and highlights becomes smoother.  
  With setting 1, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.101) is automatically set to  
[Disable] and the setting cannot be changed.  
  With setting 1, noise may become slightly more pronounced than usual.  
With setting 1, the settable range will be ISO 200 - 6400.  
Also, the <A> icon will be displayed on the LCD panel and in the  
viewfinder when highlight tone priority is enabled.  
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive  
C.Fn III -1 Lens drive when AF impossible  
If autofocus is executed, but focus cannot be achieved, the camera can  
either keep trying to focus or stop.  
0: Continue focus search  
1: Stop focus search  
Prevents the camera from becoming grossly out of focus as it attempts  
to focus again. Especially convenient with super telephoto lenses which  
can become extremely out of focus.  
C.Fn III -2 AF point selection method  
0: SActivate AF selection / 9Select AF point  
You can press the <S> button, then select the AF point directly with  
<9>.  
1: SAuto selection / 9Manual selection  
Pressing the <S> button will set automatic AF point selection. To  
select the AF point manually, you can use <9> without first pressing  
the <S> button.  
With setting 1, the C.Fn IV -2 [Assign SET button] setting will be disabled.  
255  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn III -3 Superimposed display  
0: On  
1: Off  
When focus is achieved, the AF point will not light up in red in the  
viewfinder. Set this if the AF points lighting up is too distracting.  
The AF point will still light up when you select it.  
C.Fn III -4 AF-assist beam firing  
The AF-assist beam can be emitted by the camera’s built-in flash or by an  
external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite.  
0: Enable  
1: Disable  
The AF-assist beam is not emitted.  
2: Enable external flash only  
If an external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-  
assist beam when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the  
AF-assist beam.  
3: IR AF assist beam only  
Among EOS-dedicated Speedlites, only those which have an infrared  
AF-assist beam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any  
Speedlite which uses a series of small flashes (like the built-in flash)  
from firing the AF-assist beam.  
If the external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom  
Function is set to [Disabled], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam  
even if the camera’s C.Fn III -4-0/2/3 is set.  
256  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn III -5 Mirror lockup  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
Prevents camera vibrations caused by the reflex mirror action that can  
disturb shooting with super telephoto lenses or close-up (macro)  
shooting. See page 125 for the mirror lockup procedure.  
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others  
Customizing camera controls with the Quick Control screen (p.45)  
The Custom Controls function on the Quick  
Control screen is the same as the Custom  
Functions below:  
[AF and metering buttons] : C.Fn IV -1  
[AF point selection method] : C.Fn III -2  
[Assign SET button]  
: C.Fn IV -2  
C.Fn IV -1 AF and metering buttons  
You can change the function assigned to the halfway pressing of the  
shutter button, the AF start button, and the AE lock button. You can assign  
the following functions to the buttons in one of ten combinations: Metering  
& AF start, AE lock, metering start, AF stop, and no function.  
257  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn IV -2 Assign SET button  
You can assign a frequently-used function to <0>. Press <0> when the  
camera is shooting-ready.  
0: Default (no func)  
1: Image quality  
Pressing <0> will display the image-recording quality setting screen on  
the LCD monitor. Select the desired image-recording quality, then press  
<0>.  
2: Picture Style  
Pressing <0> will display the Picture Style selection screen on the  
LCD monitor. Select a Picture Style, then press <0>.  
3: White balance  
Pressing <0> will display the white balance selection screen on the  
LCD monitor. Select the desired white balance, then press <0>.  
4: Flash exp. comp.  
Pressing <0> will display the flash exposure compensation setting  
screen on the LCD monitor. Set the flash exposure compensation, then  
press <0>.  
5: Viewfinder Q  
Pressing <0> will display the electronic level (using the exposure level  
scale) in the viewfinder.  
If C.Fn III -2-1 (AF point selection method) is set, the [Assign SET button]  
setting will be disabled.  
C.Fn IV -3 Dial direction during Tv/Av  
0: Normal  
1: Reverse direction  
The dial’s turning direction for setting the shutter speed and aperture  
can be reversed.  
In the manual exposure mode, the direction of the <6> and <5>  
dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the <6> dial will be  
reversed. The <5> dial’s turning direction will be the same for the  
manual exposure mode and exposure compensation.  
258  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn IV -4 Focusing Screen  
If you change the focusing screen, change this setting to match the  
focusing screen type. This is to obtain the standard exposure.  
0: Ef-A  
1: Ef-D  
2: Ef-S  
About focusing screen characteristics  
Ef-A: Standard Precision Matte  
Standard focusing screen which comes with the camera. It  
provides a good balance between viewfinder brightness and  
manual focusing ease.  
Ef-D: Precision Matte with Grid  
Grid lines are added to the Ef-A  
focusing screen. The grid helps to  
align the shot vertically and  
horizontally.  
Ef-S: Super Precision Matte  
The point of focus is easier to distinguish than with the Ef-A  
focusing screen. Helpful to users who often focus manually.  
About Super Precision Matte Ef-S and Maximum Lens Aperture  
  This focusing screen is optimized for f/2.8 and faster lenses.  
  With lenses slower than f/2.8, the viewfinder will look darker than with the  
Ef-A focusing screen.  
  Even if you clear all the Custom Function settings to the default settings,  
the C.Fn IV -4 setting will be retained.  
  Since the EOS 60D’s standard focusing screen is the Ef-A, C.Fn IV -4-0  
is set upon factory shipment.  
  To change the focusing screen, refer to the instructions that come with  
the focusing screen. If the focusing screen does not come down with the  
holder, tilt the camera forward.  
  The C.Fn IV -4 will not be included in the Camera user setting registered  
(p.262).  
259  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn IV -5 Add image verification data  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
Data for verifying whether the image is original or not is appended to the  
image automatically. When the shooting information of an image  
appended with the verification data is displayed (p.191), the <L> icon  
will appear.  
To verify whether the image is original, the Original Data Security Kit  
OSK-E3 (sold separately) is required.  
The images are not compatible with the image encryption/decryption  
features of Original Data Security Kit OSK-E3.  
260  
3Registering My MenuN  
Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and  
Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.  
Select [My Menu settings].  
1
  Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu  
settings], then press <0>.  
Select [Register to My Menu].  
2
  Select [Register to My Menu], then  
press <0>.  
Register the desired items.  
3
  Select the item to be registered, then  
press <0>.  
  On the confirmation dialog, select  
[OK] and press <0> to register the  
item.  
  You can register up to six items.  
  To return to the screen in step 2,  
press the <M> button.  
About My Menu settings  
  Sort  
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select  
[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then  
press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <V> key to change the  
order, then press <0>.  
  Delete item/items and Delete all items  
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete item/items]  
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all items.  
  Display from My Menu  
When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you  
display the menu screen.  
261  
w: Register Camera User SettingsN  
Under the Mode Dial’s <w> position, you can register most of the  
current camera settings including your preferred shooting mode,  
menus, Custom Function settings, etc.  
Set the camera.  
  First set the functions you want to  
1
register: Shooting mode, shutter  
speed, aperture, ISO speed, AF  
mode, AF point, metering mode, drive  
mode, exposure compensation, and  
flash exposure compensation.  
  When setting the menu functions,  
refer to the next page.  
Select [Camera user settings].  
2
  Under the [7] tab, select [Camera  
user settings], then press <0>.  
Select [Register settings].  
3
  Select [Register settings], then  
press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  On the confirmation dialog, select  
[OK] and press <0>.  
X The current camera settings will be  
registered under the Mode Dial’s  
<w> position.  
4
Clearing the Camera User Settings  
In step 3, if you select [Clear settings], the setting of the Mode Dial’s C  
position will revert to the default setting.  
262  
w: Register Camera User SettingsN  
Menu Options which can be Registered  
[1] Quality, Beep, Release shutter without card, Image review,  
Peripheral illumination correction, Red-eye reduction, Flash  
control (Flash firing, Shutter sync., Flash exposure  
compensation, E-TTL II metering, Wireless function)  
[2] Exposure compensation/AEB, Auto Lighting Optimizer,  
Picture Style, White balance, Custom White Balance, WB  
Shift/BKT, Color space  
[y] ISO Auto  
[z] Live View shooting, AF mode, Grid display, Aspect ratio,  
Exposure simulation, Silent shooting, Metering timer  
[4] Highlight alert, AF point display, Histogram, Image jump w/  
6, Slide show  
[5] Auto power off, Auto rotate, File numbering  
[6] LCD brightness, Sensor cleaning (Auto cleaning), Lock 5  
[7] INFO. button display options  
[8] Custom Functions  
  My Menu settings will not be registered.  
  When the Mode Dial is set to <w>, the [7 Clear all camera settings]  
and [8 Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] menu options will be disabled.  
  When the Mode Dial is set to <w>, you can still change the camera  
settings such as the drive mode and menu options, but the changes will  
not be registered. If you want to register those changes to the Mode  
Dial’s C position, follow the registration procedure on the preceding  
page.  
  By pressing the <B> button, you can check which shooting mode is  
registered under <w> (p.266).  
263  
14  
Reference  
This chapter provides reference information for camera  
features, system accessories, etc.  
265  
B Button Functions  
When you press the <B> button  
while the camera is ready to shoot, you  
can display [Displays camera settings],  
[Displays shooting functions] (p.267),  
and [Electronic level] (p.127).  
Under the [7] tab, the [INFO. button  
display options] option enables you to  
select what the <B> button is to  
display when pressed.  
 
Select the desired display option and press  
> to append a checkmark < >.  
<
0
X
  After making the selection, select  
[OK], then press <0>. Note that you  
cannot remove the checkmark <X>  
for all three display options.  
  The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English  
for all languages.  
  Even if you uncheck the [Electronic level] so it does not appear, it will  
still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting.  
Camera Settings  
Shooting mode registered to  
the Mode Dial’s <w>  
(p.110)  
(p.99, 100)  
(p.98)  
Red-eye reduction (p.131)  
(p.254)  
(p.254)  
(p.30)  
(p.32, 85)  
Auto power off (p.50)  
266  
B Button Functions  
Shooting Settings  
Picture Style  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
AE lock  
Shooting mode  
ISO speed  
Exposure level/  
AEB range  
Highlight tone priority  
Electronic level  
Flash exposure  
compensation*  
Custom controls  
AF mode  
Possible shots  
Quick Control icon  
Battery check  
AF point  
White balance correction  
Metering mode  
Image-recording quality  
Maximum burst  
Auto Lighting Optimizer  
Drive mode  
Eye-Fi card transmission status  
White balance  
* If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite, the flash  
exposure compensation icon will change from y to C.  
  When you press the <Q> button, the Quick Control screen appears  
(p.44).  
  If you press the <f>, <R>, <i>, <n>, or <S> button, the  
respective setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you  
can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the function. You can also  
select the AF point with <9>.  
If you turn off the power while the “Shooting settings display” screen is  
displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power  
again. To avoid this, press the <B> button to turn off the display on the  
LCD monitor, then turn off the power switch.  
267  
3Checking the Battery Information  
You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor. Each Battery  
Pack LP-E6 has a unique serial No., and you can register multiple  
battery packs to the camera. When you use this feature, you can check  
the registered battery pack’s remaining capacity and operation history.  
Select [Battery info.].  
  Under the [7] tab, select [Battery  
info.], then press <0>.  
X The battery info screen will appear.  
Battery position  
Model of the battery or household power  
source being used.  
The battery check (p.29) displays the  
remaining battery capacity in 1%  
increments.  
Shots taken with the current battery. The  
number is reset when the battery is  
recharged.  
Battery’s recharge performance level is displayed in one of three levels.  
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is fine.  
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is slightly degraded.  
(Red) : Purchasing a new battery is recommended.  
Do not use any battery other than the Battery Pack LP-E6. Otherwise, the  
camera’s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.  
  The battery information will be displayed even when the LP-E6 battery  
pack is in the Battery Grip BG-E9.  
  When size-AA/LR6 batteries are used in the Battery Grip BG-E9, only  
the battery check will be displayed.  
  If for some reason, communication with the battery is not successful, the  
battery check display will show <  
> on the LCD panel and in the  
viewfinder. [Cannot communicate with battery] will be displayed. Just  
select [OK] and you can continue shooting.  
268  
3Checking the Battery Information  
Registering the Battery to the Camera  
You can register up to six Battery Packs LP-E6 to the camera. To  
register multiple battery packs to the camera, do the procedure below  
for each battery pack.  
Press the <B> button.  
1
  With the battery info. screen  
displayed, press the <B> button.  
X The battery history screen will  
appear.  
X If the battery has not been registered,  
it will be grayed out.  
Select [Register].  
  Select [Register], then press <0>.  
X The confirmation dialog will appear.  
2
Select [OK].  
  Select [OK], then press <0>.  
X The battery pack will be registered,  
and the battery history screen will  
reappear.  
3
X The grayed-out battery number will  
now be displayed in white letters.  
  Press the <M> button. The battery  
info. screen will reappear.  
  Battery registration is not possible if size-AA/LR6 batteries are in the  
Battery Grip BG-E9 or if you use the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6.  
  If six battery packs have already been registered, [Register] cannot be  
selected. To delete unnecessary battery information, refer to page 271.  
269  
3Checking the Battery Information  
Labeling the Serial No. on the Battery  
Affixing a serial No. label onto all the registered Battery Pack LP-E6’s  
makes it convenient.  
Write the serial No. on a label.  
Serial No.  
1
  Write the serial No. displayed on the  
battery history screen on a label  
approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6  
in. in size.  
Take out the battery and affix the  
7c400300  
2 label.  
  Set the power switch to <2>.  
  Open the battery compartment cover  
and remove the battery.  
  Affix the label as shown (side with no  
electrical contacts) in the illustration.  
  Repeat this procedure for all of your  
battery packs so you can easily see  
the serial No.  
  Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in  
step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label might make it difficult to insert the  
battery or impossible to turn on the camera.  
  If you use Battery Grip BG-E9, the label might peel off as you repeatedly  
load and remove the battery pack. If it peels off, affix a new label.  
270  
3Checking the Battery Information  
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Pack  
You can check the remaining capacity of any battery pack (even while  
not installed) and also when it was last used.  
Look for the serial No.  
Date last used  
Serial No.  
  Refer to the battery’s serial No. label  
and look for the battery’s serial No. on  
the battery history screen.  
X You can check the respective battery  
pack’s remaining capacity and the  
date when it was last used.  
Remaining capacity  
Deleting the Registered Battery Pack Information  
1 Select [Delete info.].  
  Follow step 2 on page 269 to select [Delete info.], then press  
<0>.  
2 Select the battery pack information to be deleted.  
  Select the battery pack information to be deleted, then press  
<0>.  
X <X> will appear.  
  To delete another battery pack information, repeat this  
procedure.  
3 Press the <L> button.  
X The confirmation dialog will appear.  
4 Select [OK].  
  Select [OK], then press <0>.  
X The battery pack information will be deleted, and the screen in  
step 1 will reappear.  
271  
Using a Household Power Outlet  
With the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately), you can connect the  
camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining  
battery level.  
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.  
1
  Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the  
AC Adapter’s socket.  
Connect the power cord.  
2
  Connect the power cord as shown in  
the illustration.  
  After using the camera, unplug the  
power plug from the power outlet.  
Place the cord in the groove.  
3
  Insert the DC Coupler’s cord carefully  
without damaging the cord.  
Insert the DC Coupler.  
4
  Open the battery compartment cover  
and open the DC Coupler cord notch  
cover.  
  Insert the DC Coupler securely until it  
locks and put the cord through the  
DC Coupler cord hole  
notch.  
  Close the cover.  
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera’s power  
switch is set to <1>.  
272  
Using Eye-Fi Cards  
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can  
automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or  
upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN.  
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on  
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image  
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or  
inquire the card’s manufacturer.  
This product is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card  
functions (including wireless transfer). In case of an issue  
with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.  
Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in  
many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card  
is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been  
approved for use in the area, please check with the card  
manufacturer.  
Insert an Eye-Fi card. (p.32)  
1
Select [Eye-Fi settings].  
2
  Under the [5] tab, select [Eye-Fi  
settings], then press <0>.  
  This menu is displayed only when an  
Eye-Fi card has been inserted into  
the camera.  
Enable the Eye-Fi transmission.  
3
  Press <0>, set [Eye-Fi trans.] to  
[Enable], then press <0>.  
  If you set [Disable], automatic  
transmission will not occur even with  
the Eye-Fi card inserted  
(Transmission status icon I).  
273  
Using Eye-Fi Cards  
Display the connection  
4 information.  
  Select [Connection info.], then press  
<0>.  
Check the [Access point SSID:].  
  Check that an access point is  
displayed for [Access point SSID:].  
  You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s  
MAC address and firmware version.  
  Press the <M> button three times  
to exit the menu.  
5
Take the picture.  
6
X The images will be displayed.  
  For transferred images, O is  
displayed in the detailed information  
display (p.191).  
Transmission status icon  
H (Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.  
H (Blinking) Connecting : Connecting with access point.  
H (Displayed) Connected : Connection to access point established.  
H ( ) Transferring  
: Image transfer to access point in  
progress.  
* To check the Eye-Fi card’s transmission status as listed above, press the  
<B> button to display the shooting settings (p.267).  
274  
Using Eye-Fi Cards  
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards  
  If “ ” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card  
information. Turn the camera off and on again.  
  Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In  
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are  
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.  
  If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and  
personal computer settings. For details, see the card’s instruction  
manual.  
  Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image  
transfer may take longer or it might be interrupted.  
  Because of the transmission function, the Eye-Fi card may become hot.  
  The battery power will be consumed faster.  
  During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.  
275  
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes  
o: Set automatically k: User selectable  
: Not selectable  
Basic Zone  
Creative Zone  
k
k z  
k
Mode Dial  
F
k k k k k k  
o k k k k k  
k k k k k  
1 7 C 2 3 4 5 6 d sf a  
All recording quality  
settings selectable  
k
o
k k k k k k  
o o o o o o  
Auto  
k
ISO  
*
Manual  
speed  
k
Settable maximum  
k k k k k  
ISO speed limit  
Manual selection  
k k k k k  
k
Picture  
Style  
Automatic setting  
PPPQRPPP  
k k k k k k  
Shoot by ambience selection  
Shoot by lighting or scene type  
Auto  
k k k k  
k
o o o o o o o o k k k k  
k
k
k
Preset  
k k k k k  
k k k k k  
k k k k k  
White  
balance  
Custom  
Correction /  
Bracketing  
Auto Lighting Optimizer  
k
k
o o o o o o o o k k k k  
k k k k k k k k k k k k  
k
k
k
Lens peripheral illumination  
correction  
Highlight tone priority  
k k k k k  
sRGB  
k
o o o o o o o o k k k k  
Color  
space  
Adobe RGB  
k k k k k  
k k k k k  
RAW image processing  
Creative filters  
Resize  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k k k k k k k k k k k k  
k k k k k k k k k k k k  
k k k k k k k k k k k k  
Rating  
* For manual exposure only.  
  The zicon indicates still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode.  
276  
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes  
k
k z  
o
Basic Zone  
Creative Zone  
Mode Dial  
F
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
1 7 C 2 3 4 5 6 d sf a  
One-Shot  
o o o  
o k k k k  
k k k k  
k k k k  
o k k k k  
o k k k k  
o k k k k  
k k k k  
k
AI Servo  
o
o
o
AF  
AI Focus  
o o o  
o o o o o o  
o o  
o o o o o o  
AF point selection  
AF-assist beam  
Evaluative  
f
o
o
Metering  
mode  
Metering mode  
selection  
Program shift  
Exposure  
k k k  
k
k
compensation  
Exposure AEB  
AE lock  
k k k k  
k k k  
Depth-of-field  
preview  
k
k k k k  
Single shooting  
k k  
o o k  
o o  
o k k k  
k
k
High-speed  
continuous  
k
o
k k k k  
Low-speed  
continuous  
Drive  
k k  
k k  
k o  
k k k  
k
Q 10 sec.  
Q 2 sec.  
k k k k k k k k k k k  
k
k
k k k k  
k
Fires automatically  
Flash on  
o
k o  
k
o
o
k k k  
k k k  
k k  
k k  
k k  
Flash off  
o k  
o
o
o
Built-in  
flash  
Red-eye reduction  
FE lock  
k k k k k k k k k k k  
k
k
k
k k k k  
Flash exposure  
compensation  
k k k k  
k k k k  
Wireless control  
Live View shooting  
k k  
k k k k k k k k k k k  
o
Multiple aspect ratios*  
k
k k k k  
* Multiple aspect ratios are available only with Live View shooting.  
277  
Menu Settings  
1 Shooting 1 (Red)  
Quality  
Page  
84  
73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c  
1 / 41 / 61  
Beep  
Enable / Disable  
Release shutter  
without card  
Enable / Disable  
32  
Image review  
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold  
Enable / Disable  
50  
Peripheral illumination  
correction  
102  
131  
Red-eye reduction  
Disable / Enable  
Flash firing / Built-in flash function setting /  
External flash function setting / External flash  
C.Fn setting / Clear external flash C.Fn setting  
Flash control  
135  
2 Shooting 2 (Red)  
Exposure  
compensation/AEB  
1/3-stop increments, ±5 stops (AEB ±3 stops)  
121  
101  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
Disable / Low / Standard / Strong  
PStandard / QPortrait / RLandscape /  
Picture Style  
SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome / 90-95  
WUser Def. 1, 2, 3  
Q / W / E / R / Y / U / I / O /  
P (Approx. 2500 - 10000)  
White balance  
96  
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance  
97  
WB correction: White balance correction  
WB Shift/BKT  
99  
100  
WB-BKT: White balance bracketing  
Color space  
sRGB / Adobe RGB  
110  
yShooting 3 (Red)  
Dust Delete Data  
Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots  
231  
89  
Max.: 400 / Max.: 800 / Max.: 1600 /  
Max.: 3200 / Max.: 6400  
ISO Auto  
Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.  
278  
Menu Settings  
zShooting 4 (Red)  
Live View shooting  
AF mode  
Page  
157  
160  
157  
157  
158  
159  
Enable / Disable  
Live mode / uLive mode / Quick mode  
Off / Grid 1l/ Grid 2m  
3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1  
Grid display  
Aspect ratio  
Exposure simulation  
Silent shooting  
Enable / Disable  
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable  
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /  
30 min.  
Metering timer  
159  
3 Playback 1 (Blue)  
Protect images  
Rotate  
Erase-protect images  
Rotate vertical images  
Erase images  
213  
197  
215  
245  
Erase images  
Print order  
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)  
Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Toy camera effect /  
Miniature effect  
Creative filters  
220  
Resize  
Downsize the image’s pixel count  
222  
224  
RAW image processing Process 1 images  
4 Playback 2 (Blue)  
Highlight alert  
AF point display  
Histogram  
Disable / Enable  
Disable / Enable  
Brightness / RGB  
192  
193  
193  
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /  
Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating  
195  
207  
Image jump w/6  
Select the images, Play time, Repeat, and  
Transition effect for auto playback  
Slide show  
Rating  
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p  
198  
211  
Control over HDMI  
Disable / Enable  
279  
Menu Settings  
5 Set-up 1 (Yellow)  
Page  
50  
1min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. /  
30 min. / Off  
Auto power off  
Auto rotate  
Format  
OnzD / OnD / Off  
218  
48  
Initialize and erase data on the card  
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset  
Create and select a folder  
File numbering  
Select folder  
106  
104  
Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / Enable  
Connection information  
Eye-Fi settings*  
273  
* Displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is used.  
6 Set-up 2 (Yellow)  
LCD brightness  
Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels  
217  
30  
Set the date (year, month, day) and time (hour,  
min., sec.)  
Date/Time  
LanguageK  
Select the interface language  
NTSC / PAL  
31  
Video system  
212  
Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable  
Clean now  
230  
Sensor cleaning  
Clean manually  
233  
42  
Lock 5  
Disable / Enable  
7 Set-up 3 (Yellow)  
Type, Remaining capacity, Shutter count,  
Recharge performance, Battery registration,  
Battery history  
Battery info.  
268  
INFO. button display  
options  
Displays camera settings / Electronic level /  
Displays shooting functions  
266  
262  
Register current camera settings to the Mode  
Dial’s <w> position  
Camera user settings  
Display copyright information / Enter author’s  
Copyright information name / Enter copyright details / Delete  
108  
copyright information  
Clear all camera settings Resets the camera to the default settings  
51  
Firmware Ver.  
For updating the firmware  
280  
Menu Settings  
8 Custom Functions (Orange)  
C.Fn I : Exposure  
Page  
252  
254  
C.Fn II : Image  
C.Fn III : Autofocus/  
Customize camera functions as desired  
255  
257  
250  
Drive  
C.Fn IV : Operation/  
Others  
Clear all Custom  
Functions (C.Fn)  
Clears all Custom Function settings  
9 My Menu (Green)  
Register frequently-used menu items and  
Custom Functions  
My Menu settings  
261  
Movie Shooting Mode Menus  
nMovie 1 (Red)  
Movie exposure  
AF mode  
Auto / Manual  
182  
182  
Live mode / uLive mode / Quick mode  
AF w/ shutter button  
during k  
Disable / Enable  
182  
183  
183  
183  
AF and metering  
buttons for k  
Customize the shutter button, <p>  
button, and <A> button  
kISO speed setting  
increments  
1/3-stop / 1-stop  
Disable / Enable  
kHighlight tone  
priority  
281  
Menu Settings  
oMovie 2 (Red)  
Page  
180  
1920x1080 (6 / 5 / 4) /  
1280x720 (8 / 7) /  
640x480 (8 / 7) /  
Movie recording size  
Crop 640x480 (8 / 7)  
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable  
Recording level  
Sound recording  
184  
Wind filter: Disable / Enable  
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable  
Silent shooting  
Metering timer  
Grid display  
185  
185  
185  
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. /  
30 min.  
Off / Grid 1l/ Grid 2m  
Z Movie 3 (Red)  
Exposure  
compensation  
1/3-stop increments, ±5 stops  
186  
186  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
Disable / Low / Standard / Strong  
PStandard / QPortrait / RLandscape /  
Picture Style  
SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome / 186  
WUser Def. 1, 2, 3  
Q / W / E / R / Y / U / I / O /  
186  
White balance  
P (Approx. 2500 - 10000)  
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance  
186  
About the menu screen in movie shooting mode  
  The [n] Movie 1, [o] Movie 2, and [Z] Movie 3 screens (tabs)  
are displayed only in the movie shooting mode.  
  The [2] Shooting 2, [y] Shooting 3, [z] Shooting 4, [8] Custom  
Function, and [9] My Menu screens (tabs) will not be displayed.  
  The following menu items will not be displayed:  
• [1]: Red-eye reduction, Flash control  
• [7] : INFO. button display options, Camera user settings, Copyright  
information, Clear all camera settings, Firmware Ver.  
282  
Troubleshooting Guide  
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting  
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,  
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.  
Power-Related Problems  
The battery pack does not recharge.  
  If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.268) is 94% or higher, the battery  
will not be recharged.  
 
Do not recharge any battery pack other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6.  
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.  
 
If there is a problem with the battery charger or battery pack or if  
communication with the battery pack (non-Canon battery packs) is not  
possible, the protective circuit will terminate the charging and the orange  
lamp will blink quickly at a regular interval. If there is a problem with the  
battery charger or battery pack, unplug the charger’s power plug from the  
power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery pack to the charger. Wait 2  
to 3 minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the  
problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.  
The charger’s lamp does not blink.  
 
If the internal temperature of the battery pack attached to the charger is  
high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp  
off). During the charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for  
any reason, the charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the  
battery temperature goes down, the charging will resume automatically.  
The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <  
1>.  
  The battery is not properly installed in the camera (p.26).  
  Recharge the battery (p.24).  
  Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.26).  
  Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.32).  
283  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to <  
2>.  
  If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card,  
the access lamp will still continue to light/blink for a few seconds.  
When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off  
automatically.  
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.  
  Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.24).  
  The battery performance might have degraded. See the [7 Battery  
info.] menu option to check the battery’s performance level (p.268). If  
the battery performance is poor, replace the battery pack with a new  
one.  
  If you keep displaying the Quick Control screen (p.44) or do Live View  
shooting or movie shooting (p.151, 171) for a prolonged period, the  
number of possible shots will decrease.  
The camera turns off by itself.  
  Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take  
effect, set [5 Auto power off] to [Off].  
Shooting-Related Problems  
No images can be shot nor recorded.  
  The card is not properly inserted (p.32).  
  If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to  
make room (p.32, 215).  
  If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode while the focus  
confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be  
taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to focus, or focus  
manually (p.40, 80).  
  Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (p.32).  
284  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The card cannot be used.  
  If a card error message is displayed, see page 33 or 291.  
The image is out of focus.  
  Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.34).  
  To prevent camera shake, press the shutter button gently (p.39, 40).  
  If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.  
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.  
  Set [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction] to one of the  
following settings: [Standard/Low/Disable]. If it is set to [Strong], the  
maximum burst during continuous shooting will greatly decrease  
(p.254).  
  If you shoot something that has fine detail (field of grass, etc.), the file  
size will be larger and the actual maximum burst might be lower than  
the number mentioned on page 85.  
ISO 100 cannot be set.  
  If [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], ISO 100  
cannot be set. If [Disable] is set, ISO 100 can be set (p.255). This also  
applies to movie shooting (p.183).  
The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set.  
  If [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the Auto  
Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. When [Highlight tone priority] is  
set to [Disable], then the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.255).  
This also applies to movie shooting (p.183).  
285  
Troubleshooting Guide  
When I use the <f> mode with flash, the shutter speed  
becomes slow.  
  If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed  
becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the  
subject and background are properly exposed. If you do not want a  
slow shutter speed to be set, set [8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in  
Av mode] to 1 or 2 (p.253).  
The built-in flash does not fire.  
  If you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals, the  
flash might stop operating to protect the flash unit.  
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.  
  If flash exposure compensation has already been set with the  
Speedlite, flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the  
camera. When the Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is  
canceled (set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the  
camera.  
High-speed sync cannot be set in the Av mode.  
  Set [8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to [0: Auto]  
(p.253).  
The external flash does not fire.  
  If you use a non-Canon flash with Live View shooting, set the [z  
Silent shoot.] menu option to [Disable] (p.159).  
The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.  
  The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal.  
286  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View shooting.  
  If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot  
(p.153).  
The camera button/dial’s function has changed.  
  On the Quick Control screen, check the [Custom Controls] setting  
(p.257).  
Movie shooting terminates by itself.  
  If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop  
automatically. Use an SD Speed Class 6 “  
” or faster card. To  
find out the card’s read/write speed, see the card manufacturer’s Web  
site, etc.  
  The movie shooting will be terminated automatically if the file size  
reaches 4 GB or if the movie length reaches 29 min. 59 sec.  
During Live View and movie shooting, a white < > or  
red <E> icon is displayed.  
  Both icons indicate that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If  
the white < > icon appears, the still photo’s image quality might  
deteriorate. The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View or movie  
shooting will soon be terminated automatically (p.152, 173).  
The movie sometimes freezes momentarily.  
  If there is a drastic change in the exposure during movie shooting, the  
autoexposure stops the recording until the exposure stabilizes. If this  
happens, use manual exposure.  
The movie cannot play.  
  Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided software,  
etc., cannot be played with the camera.  
287  
Troubleshooting Guide  
When the movie is played, camera operation noise can be heard.  
  If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the  
operation noise will also be recorded. Use an external microphone  
(commercially available) (p.187).  
Display & Operation Problems  
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.  
  If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.  
  In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow  
or might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.  
The menu screen shows few tabs and options.  
  In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and  
menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative  
Zone mode (p.46).  
The image cannot be erased.  
  If the image has been protected, it cannot be erased (p.213).  
Part of the image blinks in black.  
  The [4 Highlight alert] menu option is set to [Enable] (p.192).  
A red box is displayed on the image.  
  The [4 AF point disp.] menu option is set to [Enable] (p.193).  
288  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_MG_”).  
  Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character  
will be an underscore (p.110).  
The file numbering does not start from 0001.  
  If you use a card which already has images recorded, the file  
numbering might start from the last image in the card (p.106).  
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.  
  The correct date and time has not been set (p.30).  
No image appears on the TV screen.  
  Make sure the AV cable or HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in  
(p.209, 212).  
  Set the video OUT system (NTSC/PAL) to the same video system as  
the TV set (p.212).  
  Use the AV cable that came with the camera (p.212).  
The card reader does not detect the card.  
  Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards  
might not be correctly detected. In such a case, connect your camera  
and computer with the provided interface cable, and transfer the  
images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided software).  
289  
Troubleshooting Guide  
[###] is displayed.  
  [###] will be displayed when the number of images/movies exceeds  
the number of digits that can be displayed.  
The [Eye-Fi settings] menu item does not appear.  
  [Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into  
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect tab set to the LOCK  
position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection status or  
disable Eye-Fi card transmission.  
Printing-Related Problems  
There are fewer printing effects than listed in the  
instruction manual.  
  What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. This  
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.240).  
290  
Error Codes  
If there is a problem with the camera, an  
error message will appear. Follow the on-  
screen instructions.  
Error No.  
Countermeasures  
No.  
Error Message & Solution  
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the  
lens contacts.  
01  
ÎClean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens and use a  
Canon lens (p.13, 16).  
Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card  
with camera.  
02  
04  
ÎRemove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the  
card (p.32, 48).  
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.  
ÎReplace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card  
(p.32, 48, 215).  
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on  
again.  
05  
06  
ÎOperate the power switch (p.28).  
Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on again.  
ÎOperate the power switch (p.28).  
Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and  
on again or re-install the battery.  
10, 20,  
30, 40,  
50, 60,  
70, 80  
ÎOperate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack  
again, or use a Canon lens (p.26, 28).  
* If the error still persists, write down the error No. and contact your nearest  
Canon Service Center.  
291  
System Map  
Eyepiece Extender  
EP-EX15  
ST-E2 270EX 430EX II 580EX II Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite  
MR-14EX  
MT-24EX  
Rubber Frame Eb  
E-series Dioptric  
Adjustment Lenses  
Bundled Accessories  
Focusing  
Screen Ef-A  
Eyecup Eb  
Angle Finder C  
Wide Strap  
EW-EOS60D  
Focusing Screen  
Ef-D Ef-S  
Battery Pack  
LP-E6  
Battery Charger  
LC-E6 or LC-E6E  
Hand Strap  
E2  
Car Battery  
Cable CB-570  
Battery Grip  
BG-E9  
Car Battery Charger  
CBC-E6  
AC Adapter DC Coupler  
AC-E6 DR-E6  
Battery Magazine  
BGM-E9L for two  
LP-E6 battery packs  
Battery Magazine  
AC Adapter Kit  
BGM-E9A for  
ACK-E6  
size-AA/LR6 batteries  
292  
System Map  
Remote  
Controller  
RC-6  
Leather Case  
EH21-L  
Remote Switch  
RS-60E3  
EF lenses  
EF-S lenses  
External microphone  
HDMI Cable  
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)  
TV/Video  
Stereo AV Cable  
AVC-DC400ST  
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)  
PictBridge-compatible printer  
EOS DIGITAL  
EOS DIGITAL  
Solution Disk  
Software Instruction  
Manuals Disk  
Interface Cable  
(1.3 m/4.3 ft.)  
Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U  
(1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)  
Computer  
USB port  
Windows 7  
Windows Vista  
Windows XP  
Mac OS X  
Original Data  
Security Kit  
PC card slot  
Card reader  
OSK-E3  
SD memory card/  
SDHC memory card/  
SDXC memory card  
PCMCIA adapter  
* The length of all cables is approx. **m/**ft.  
293  
Specifications  
• Type  
Type:  
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in flash  
Recording media:  
SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC memory  
card  
Image sensor size:  
Compatible lenses:  
22.3 x 14.9 mm  
Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)  
(35mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the  
lens focal length)  
Lens mount:  
Canon EF mount  
• Image Sensor  
Type:  
CMOS sensor  
Effective pixels:  
Aspect ratio:  
Approx. 18.00 megapixels  
3:2  
Dust delete feature:  
Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending  
• Recording System  
Recording format:  
Image type:  
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0  
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original)  
RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible  
Recorded pixels:  
Large  
Medium  
: Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)  
: Approx. 8.00 megapixels (3456 x 2304)  
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)  
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)  
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)  
RAW  
M-RAW  
S-RAW  
: Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)  
: Approx. 10.10 megapixels (3888 x 2592)  
: Approx. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)  
Create/select a folder: Possible  
• Image Processing During Shooting  
Picture Style:  
Basic+:  
Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,  
Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3  
Shoot by ambience selection, Shoot by lighting or scene  
type  
White balance:  
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,  
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color  
temperature setting (Approx. 2500-10000K), white  
balance correction, and white balance bracketing possible  
* Color temperature information transmission enabled  
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots  
Noise reduction:  
294  
Specifications  
Automatic image  
brightness correction: Auto Lighting Optimizer  
Highlight tone priority: Provided  
Lens peripheral  
illumination correction: Provided  
• Viewfinder  
Type:  
Eye-level pentaprism  
Coverage:  
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 96% (with Eye point approx.  
22 mm)  
-1  
Magnification:  
Eye point:  
Built-in dioptric adjustment:Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m (dpt)  
Approx. 0.95x (-1 m with 50mm lens at infinity)  
-1  
Approx. 22 mm (From eyepiece lens center at -1 m  
)
-1  
Focusing screen:  
Electronic level:  
Interchangeable (Two types sold separately), Ef-A provided  
Horizontal level displayed up to ±9° in ±1° increments  
(For horizontal shooting only)  
Mirror:  
Quick-return type  
Depth-of-field preview: Provided  
• Autofocus  
Type:  
TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection  
AF points:  
9 (All cross-type)  
Metering range:  
Focus modes:  
AF-assist beam:  
EV -0.5 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)  
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing (MF)  
Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash  
• Exposure Control  
Metering modes:  
63-zone TTL full-aperture metering  
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)  
• Partial metering (approx. 6.5% of viewfinder at center)  
• Spot metering (approx. 2.8% of viewfinder at center)  
• Center-weighted average metering  
Metering range:  
EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens,  
ISO 100)  
Exposure control:  
Program AE (Full Auto, Flash Off, Creative Auto, Portrait,  
Landscape, Close-up, Sports, Night Portrait, Program), shutter-  
priority AE, aperture-priority AE, manual exposure, bulb exposure  
Basic Zone modes: ISO 100 - 3200 set automatically  
Creative Zone modes:ISO 100 - 6400 set manually  
(1/3-stop increments), ISO 100 - 6400 set automatically,  
or ISO expansion to “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800)  
ISO speed:  
(Recommended  
exposure index)  
295  
Specifications  
Exposure compensation: Manual:±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments  
AEB: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (Can be  
combined with manual exposure compensation)  
AE lock:  
Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative  
metering when focus is achieved  
Manual:By AE lock button  
• Shutter  
Type:  
Shutter speeds:  
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter  
1/8000 sec. to 1/60 sec. (Full Auto mode),  
Flash X-sync at maximum 1/250 sec.  
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec., bulb (Total shutter speed range.  
Available range varies by shooting mode.)  
• Flash  
Built-in flash:  
Retractable, auto pop-up flash  
Guide No.: Approx. 13/43 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)  
Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view  
Recycling time approx. 3 sec.  
Wireless master unit function provided  
EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions settable with the  
camera)  
External flash:  
Flash metering:  
Flash exposure  
compensation:  
FE lock:  
E-TTL II autoflash  
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments  
Provided  
None  
PC terminal:  
• Drive System  
Drive modes:  
Single, High-speed continuous, Low-speed continuous,  
10-sec. self-timer/remote control, 2-sec. self-timer/  
remote control  
Continuous shooting speed: Max. approx. 5.3 shots/sec.  
Max. burst:  
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 58 shots  
RAW: Approx. 16 shots  
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 7 shots  
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO  
100 and Standard Picture Style) and a 4GB card.  
296  
Specifications  
• Live View Shooting  
Aspect ratio settings:  
Focusing:  
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1  
Live mode, Face detection Live mode (Contrast detection)  
Quick mode (Phase-difference detection)  
Manual focusing (Approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)  
Evaluative metering with the image sensor  
EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens,  
ISO 100)  
Metering modes:  
Metering range:  
Silent shooting:  
Grid display:  
Provided (Mode 1 and 2)  
Two types  
• Movie Shooting  
Movie compression:  
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264  
Variable (average) bit rate  
Audio recording format: Linear PCM  
Recording format:  
Recording size  
and frame rate:  
MOV  
1920x1080 (Full HD): 30p/25p/24p  
1280x720 (HD)  
640x480 (SD)  
: 60p/50p  
: 60p/50p  
Crop 640x480 (SD) : 60p/50p  
* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.00 fps, 24p: 23.976 fps, 60p:  
59.94 fps, 50p: 50.00 fps  
File size:  
1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p) : Approx. 330 MB/min.  
1280x720 (60p/50p)  
640x480 (60p/50p)  
: Approx. 330 MB/min.  
: Approx. 165 MB/min.  
Crop 640x480 (60p/50p) : Approx. 165 MB/min.  
Same as focusing with Live View shooting  
Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with  
the image sensor  
Focusing:  
Metering modes:  
* Automatically set by the focusing mode  
EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens,  
ISO 100)  
Metering range:  
Exposure control:  
Program AE (exposure compensation possible) for  
movies, manual exposure  
Exposure compensation: ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (Still photos: ±5 stops)  
ISO speed:  
(Recommended  
exposure index)  
Automatically set within ISO 100 - 6400  
With manual exposure, ISO 100 - 6400 set  
automatically/manually  
297  
Specifications  
Sound recording:  
Built-in monaural microphone  
External stereo microphone terminal provided  
Sound recording level adjustable, wind filter provided  
Two types  
Grid display:  
• LCD Monitor  
Type:  
TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor  
Monitor size and dots: Wide, 7.7 cm (3 inches) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots  
Coverage:  
Angle adjustment:  
Approx. 100%  
Possible  
Brightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)  
Electronic level:  
Interface languages:  
Horizontal level displayed in 1° increments  
25  
• Image Playback  
Image display formats: Single image, Single image + Info (Basic info, detailed  
info, histogram), 4-image index, 9-image index, image  
rotate possible  
Zoom magnification:  
Approx. 1.5x - 10x  
Image browsing methods:Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting  
date, by folder, by movie, by stills, by rating  
Highlight alert:  
Slide show:  
Overexposed highlights blink  
All images, by date, by folder, movies, stills, or by rating  
Three transition effects selectable  
Movie playback:  
Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT)  
Built-in speaker  
• Post-Processing of Images  
In-camera RAW image  
processing:  
Brightness adjustment, white balance, Picture Style, Auto  
Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction at high ISO speeds,  
JPEG recording quality, color space, peripheral  
illumination correction, distortion correction, and  
chromatic aberration correction  
Creative filters:  
Resize:  
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect  
Possible  
Ratings:  
Provided  
• Direct Printing  
Compatible printers:  
Printable images:  
Print ordering:  
PictBridge-compatible printers  
JPEG and RAW images  
DPOF Version 1.1 compatible  
298  
Specifications  
• Custom Functions  
Custom Functions:  
20  
Camera user settings: Register under Mode Dial’s C  
My Menu registration: Possible  
Copyright information: Entry and inclusion enabled  
• Interface  
Audio/video OUT/  
Digital terminal:  
Analog video (Compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio  
output  
For personal computer communication and direct printing  
(Hi-Speed USB equivalent)  
HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible  
External microphone  
IN terminal:  
3.5mm dia. stereo mini-jack  
Remote control terminal: For Remote Switch RS-60E3  
Wireless remote control: Remote Controller RC-6  
• Power  
Battery:  
Battery Pack LP-E6 (Quantity 1)  
* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6  
* With Battery Grip BG-E9 attached, size-AA/LR6  
batteries can be used  
Battery information:  
Remaining capacity, Shutter count, and Recharge  
performance displayed  
Battery life:  
With viewfinder shooting:  
(Based on CIPA  
testing standards)  
Approx. 1100 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 1000 shots at 0°C/32°F  
With Live View shooting:  
Approx. 320 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 280 shots at 0°C/32°F  
Approx. 2 hours at 23°C/73°F  
Movie shooting time:  
Approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at 0°C/32°F  
(With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6)  
• Dimensions and Weight  
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 144.5 x 105.8 x 78.6 mm / 5.7 x 4.2 x 3.1 in.  
Weight:  
Approx. 755 g / 26.6 oz. (CIPA Guidelines),  
Approx. 675 g / 23.8 oz. (Body only)  
• Operation Environment  
Working temperature range: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F  
Working humidity:  
85% or less  
299  
Specifications  
• Battery Pack LP-E6  
Type:  
Rated voltage:  
Battery capacity:  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
7.2 V DC  
1800 mAh  
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 38.4 x 21.0 x 56.8 mm / 1.5 x 0.8 x 2.2 in.  
Weight: Approx. 80 g / 2.8 oz.  
• Battery Charger LC-E6  
Compatible battery:  
Recharging time:  
Rated input:  
Battery Pack LP-E6  
Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.  
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)  
8.4 V DC / 1.2A  
Rated output:  
Working temperature range: 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F  
Working humidity: 85% or less  
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.  
Weight: Approx. 130 g / 4.6 oz.  
• Battery Charger LC-E6E  
Compatible battery:  
Power cord length:  
Recharging time:  
Rated input:  
Battery Pack LP-E6  
Approx. 1 m / 3.3 ft.  
Approx. 2 hours 30 min.  
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)  
8.4 V DC/1.2A  
Rated output:  
Working temperature range:5  
Working humidity:  
°
C - 40  
85% or less  
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.  
°C / 41°F - 104°F  
Weight:  
Approx. 125 g / 4.4 oz. (excluding power cord)  
300  
Specifications  
• EF-S 18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS  
Angle of view:  
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 27°50’  
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 23°20’  
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 15°40’  
11 elements in 9 groups  
f/22 - 36  
Lens construction:  
Minimum aperture:  
Closest focusing distance: 0.25 m / 0.82 ft. (From image sensor plane)  
Max. magnification:  
Field of view:  
0.34x (at 55 mm)  
207 x 134 - 67 x 45 mm / 8.1 x 5.3 - 2.6 x 1.8 in. (at 0.25  
m / 0.82 ft.)  
Lens shift type  
58 mm  
Image Stabilizer:  
Filter size:  
Lens cap:  
E-58  
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 68.5 x 70.0 mm / 2.7 x 2.8 in.  
Weight:  
Hood:  
Case:  
Approx. 200 g / 7.1 oz.  
EW-60C (sold separately)  
LP814 (sold separately)  
• EF-S 15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM  
Angle of view:  
Diagonal extent: 84°30’ - 18°25’  
Horizontal extent: 74°10’ - 15°25’  
Vertical extent: 53°30’ - 10°25’  
17 elements in 12 groups  
f/22 - 36  
Lens construction:  
Minimum aperture:  
Closest focusing distance: 0.35 m / 1.15 ft. (From image sensor plane)  
Max. magnification:  
Field of view:  
0.21x (at 85mm)  
255 x 395 - 72 x 108 mm / 10.0 x 15.6 - 2.8 x 4.3 in. (at  
0.35 m / 1.15 ft.)  
Lens shift type  
72 mm  
Image Stabilizer:  
Filter size:  
Lens cap:  
E-72U  
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 81.6 x 87.5 mm / 3.2 x 3.4 in.  
Weight:  
Hood:  
Case:  
Approx. 575 g / 20.3 oz.  
EW-78E (sold separately)  
LP1116 (sold separately)  
301  
Specifications  
• EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS  
Angle of view:  
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 11°30’  
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 9°30’  
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 6°20’  
16 elements in 12 groups  
f/22 - 36  
Lens construction:  
Minimum aperture:  
Closest focusing distance*: At 18mm focal length: 0.49 m / 1.61 ft.  
(327 x 503 mm / 12.9 x 19.8 in. field of view)  
At 135mm focal length: 0.45 m / 1.48 ft.  
(75 x 112 mm / 3.0 x 4.4 in. field of view)  
* Distance from image sensor plane  
Max. magnification:  
Image Stabilizer:  
Filter size:  
0.21x (at 135mm)  
Lens shift type  
67 mm  
Lens cap:  
E-67U  
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 75.4 x 101.0 mm / 3.0 x 4.0 in.  
Weight:  
Hood:  
Case:  
Approx. 455 g / 16.0 oz.  
EW-73B (sold separately)  
LP1116 (sold separately)  
• EF-S 18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS  
Angle of view:  
Diagonal extent: 74°20’ - 7°50’  
Horizontal extent: 64°30’ - 6°30’  
Vertical extent: 45°30’ - 4°20’  
16 elements in 12 groups  
f/22 - 36  
Lens construction:  
Minimum aperture:  
Closest focusing distance: 0.45 m / 1.48 ft. (From image sensor plane)  
Max. magnification:  
Field of view:  
0.24x (at 200mm)  
452 x 291 - 93 x 62 mm / 17.8 x 11.5 - 3.7 x 2.4 in. (at  
0.45 m / 1.48 ft.)  
Lens shift type  
72 mm  
Image Stabilizer:  
Filter size:  
Lens cap:  
E-72  
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 78.6 x 102.0 mm / 3.1 x 4.0 in.  
Weight:  
Hood:  
Case:  
Approx. 595 g / 21.0 oz.  
EW-78D (sold separately)  
LP1116 (sold separately)  
302  
Specifications  
• EF-S 17-85mm f/4-5.6 IS USM  
Angle of view:  
Diagonal extent: 78°30’ - 18°25’  
Horizontal extent: 68°40’ - 15°25’  
Vertical extent: 48°00’ - 10°25’  
17 elements in 12 groups  
f/22 - 32  
Lens construction:  
Minimum aperture:  
Closest focusing distance:0.35 m / 1.15 ft. (From image sensor plane)  
Max. magnification:  
Field of view:  
0.2x (at 85mm)  
328 x 219 - 112 x 75 mm / 12.9 x 8.6 - 4.4 x 3.0 in. (at  
0.35 m)  
Image Stabilizer:  
Filter size:  
Lens shift type  
67 mm  
Lens cap:  
E-67U  
Max. diameter x length: Approx. 78.5 x 92.0 mm / 3.1 x 3.6 in.  
Weight:  
Hood:  
Case:  
Approx. 475 g / 16.8 oz.  
EW-73B (sold separately)  
LP1116 (sold separately)  
  All specifications above are based on Canon’s testing standards.  
  Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on  
CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).  
  Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.  
  If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the  
respective lens maker.  
Trademarks  
  Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
  Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and other countries.  
  Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc.  
in the United States and other countries.  
  SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
  HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are a trademark or  
registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
  All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this  
manual are the property of their respective owners.  
303  
About MPEG-4 Licensing  
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be  
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video  
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a  
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.  
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”  
* Notice displayed in English as required.  
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended  
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with  
genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this  
product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-  
genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery  
pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the  
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request  
such repairs on a chargeable basis.  
Battery Pack LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an  
incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or  
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.  
304  
Safety Warnings  
Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death,  
and material damage.  
Preventing Serious Injury or Death  
To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the  
safeguards below:  
- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this  
booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.  
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do  
not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose  
the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery  
pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.  
- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not  
mix new and old or different types of batteries.  
- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range  
of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.  
- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,  
accessories, connecting cables, etc.  
• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a child swallows the battery, consult a  
physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.)  
• When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts  
with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent  
fire or an explosion.  
• If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging,  
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging  
and prevent a fire.  
• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or  
fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.  
• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can  
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or  
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a  
physician immediately.  
• During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord  
can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.  
• Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the  
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.  
• Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When  
using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter away.  
• Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and  
disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and  
fire.  
• Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an  
explosion or fire.  
305  
• If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do  
not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause  
electrical shock.  
• Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.  
Doing so may damage your vision.  
• Keep the camera from the reach of small children. The neck strap can accidentally  
choke the child.  
• Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and  
electrical shock.  
• Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.  
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s  
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.  
To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:  
- Always insert the power plug all the way in.  
- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.  
- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.  
- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord.  
Also do not twist or tie the cords.  
- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.  
- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.  
• Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around  
the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet  
may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.  
Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage  
• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The  
equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.  
• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause  
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.  
• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap  
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.  
• Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap  
heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.  
• If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera,  
promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and  
electrical shock.  
• Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so  
may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up  
battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.  
• Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment.  
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.  
If the product does not work properly or requires repair, contact  
your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center.  
306  
European Union (and EEA) only.  
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be  
disposed of with your household waste, according to  
the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC), the Battery Directive  
(2006/66/EC) and/or your national laws implementing  
those Directives.  
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol  
shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive,  
this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is  
present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable  
threshold specified in the Battery Directive.  
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an  
authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an  
authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment  
(EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste  
could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to  
potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE.  
Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the  
effective usage of natural resources.  
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your  
local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste  
disposal service or visit  
www.canon-europe.com/environment.  
(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)  
307  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
1. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS — This manual contains important safety  
and operating instructions for Battery Charger LC-E6 & LC-E6E.  
2. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary remarks on  
(1) the charger, (2) the battery pack, and (3) the product using the battery  
pack.  
3. CAUTION To reduce risk of injury, charge only the Battery Pack LP-E6.  
Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and other  
damage.  
4. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.  
5. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in  
fire, electric shock, or personal injury.  
6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than  
by cord when disconnecting charger.  
7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or  
otherwise subjected to damage or stress.  
8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them  
immediately.  
9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,  
or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified serviceman.  
10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a qualified serviceman when  
service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of  
electric shock or fire.  
11. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug charger from outlet before  
attempting any maintenance or cleaning.  
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION  
Unless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user serviceable parts  
inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.  
CAUTION  
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT  
TYPE.  
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.  
308  
Software Start Guide and  
Instruction Manual Index  
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk......................................310  
Installing the Software ......................................311 / 312  
EOS DIGITAL Software Instruction Manuals Disk.....313  
Index..........................................................................314  
EOS DIGITAL  
Solution Disk  
(Software)  
EOS DIGITAL  
Software Instruction  
Manuals Disk  
309  
Software Start Guide  
EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk  
This disk contains various software for EOS DIGITAL cameras.  
Communication Software for the Camera and Computer  
C EOS Utility  
 
You can download images (still images/movies) you have shot with the  
camera to your computer.  
 
 
You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer.  
You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera with your  
computer.  
Image Viewing and Editing Software  
D Digital Photo Professional  
 
You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer at high-  
speed.  
 
 
You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.  
Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals.  
It is especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images.  
Image Viewing and Editing Software  
ZoomBrowser EX (Windows) / ImageBrowser (Macintosh)  
E
  You can view, edit and print JPEG images on your computer.  
  You can organize and sort images by shooting date or theme.  
  You can play and edit MOV movies and extract still images from movies.  
  Recommended for novices who are using a digital camera for the first  
time and amateur users.  
Picture Style File Creating Software  
F Picture Style Editor  
 
This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in  
editing images.  
 
You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and  
create/save an original Picture Style file.  
310  
Software Start Guide  
Installing the Software  
Compatible OS Windows 7  
Windows Vista  
Windows XP  
1
Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.  
  Never connect the camera to your computer before you install the  
software. The software will not be installed correctly.  
2
3
Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CD).  
Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.  
  Follow the windows displayed for the rest of the installation  
procedure.  
BWhen installation ends, the window for Step 4 appears.  
4
5
Click [Restart].  
Once your computer has restarted, remove the CD.  
  To download images from the cameras, refer to the EOS Utility  
Instruction Manual (PDF electronic manual).  
  “WFT Utility” and “Original Data Security Tools” software for the  
accessories (sold separately) will also be installed. If not  
necessary, uninstall the software.  
311  
Software Start Guide  
Installing the Software  
Compatible OS MAC OS X 10.4 - 10.6  
1
Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.  
2
Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CD).  
  On your computer’s desktop, double-click and open the CD-ROM  
icon, and then double-click [Canon EOS Digital Installer].  
3
Click [Install] to start installation.  
  Follow the windows displayed for the rest of the installation  
procedure.  
  When installation ends, the window for Step 4 appears.  
4
5
Click [Finish].  
Remove the CD.  
  To download images from the cameras, refer to the EOS Utility  
Instruction Manual (PDF electronic manual).  
  “WFT Utility” software for the accessories (sold separately) will  
also be installed. If not necessary, uninstall the software.  
312  
[WINDOWS]  
EOS DIGITAL Software Instruction Manuals Disk  
Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the CD to your computer.  
1
Insert the EOS DIGITAL Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into  
the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
2
Open the CD.  
  Click [Start] X [My Computer] (in versions other than Windows  
XP, double-click [My Computer] on the desktop) and then  
double-click the CD-ROM drive into which you have inserted the  
CD.  
Select your language. The index of the Instruction Manuals is  
displayed.  
Acrobat Reader (version 6.0 or later) must be installed to view the Instruction Manual  
files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your computer.  
To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe  
Reader.  
[MACINTOSH]  
EOS DIGITAL Software Instruction Manuals Disk  
Copy the PDF Instruction Manuals contained on the CD to your Macintosh.  
1
Insert the EOS DIGITAL Software Instruction Manuals Disk (CD) into  
the CD-ROM drive of your Macintosh.  
2
3
Open the CD.  
  Double-click on the CD icon.  
Double-click the START.html file.  
Select your language. The index of the Instruction Manuals is  
displayed.  
Acrobat Reader (version 6.0 or later) must be installed to view the Instruction Manual  
files (PDF format). Install Adobe Reader if it is not already installed on your Macintosh.  
To save the PDF manual to your computer, use the ‘Save’ function of your Adobe  
Reader.  
313  
Index  
10-sec. or 2-sec. delay ...................82  
1280x720......................................180  
1920x1080....................................180  
1st-curtain sync.............................137  
2nd-curtain sync ...........................137  
4- or 9-image index display...........194  
640x480........................................180  
9-point AF auto selection................78  
Battery................................ 24, 26, 29  
Battery check ................................. 29  
Battery Grip............................ 29, 292  
Beeper.......................................... 278  
Black-and-white image....... 68, 91, 93  
Bracketing ............................ 100, 121  
Bulb.............................................. 123  
C
A
w.................................................. 262  
C(Creative Auto)......................... 59  
Cable........................ 3, 202, 209, 292  
A/V OUT ...............................202, 212  
AC Adapter Kit..............................272  
Access lamp ...................................33  
Adobe RGB...................................110  
AE lock..........................................122  
AEB.......................................121, 252  
AF .............................................76, 78  
AF point ..........................................78  
AF-ON (AF start) button..................40  
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)................77  
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF)................77  
AI Servo AF ..............................56, 77  
Aperture-priority AE ......................116  
Aspect ratio...................................157  
Audio/video OUT ..................202, 209  
Auto Lighting Optimizer ..........53, 101  
Auto playback ...............................207  
Auto power off...........................28, 50  
Auto reset .....................................107  
Auto rotate of vertical images .......218  
Autofocus..................................76, 78  
Automatic selection (AF).................78  
Automatic selection of AF point ......78  
Av (Aperture-priority AE)...............116  
Camera  
Camera shake ......................... 125  
Clear camera settings................ 51  
Holding the camera.................... 39  
Settings display........................ 266  
Camera shake.......................... 38, 39  
Camera user settings............. 20, 262  
Card ................................... 13, 32, 48  
Card reminder............................ 32  
Format ....................................... 48  
Problem ............................... 33, 49  
Center-weighted average  
metering ....................................... 119  
Charger .................................... 22, 24  
Cleaning....................................... 229  
Clear camera settings .................... 51  
Clock .............................................. 30  
Close-up......................................... 64  
Color space.................................. 110  
Color temperature .................... 96, 98  
Color tone....................................... 92  
Continuous................................... 106  
Continuous shooting ...................... 81  
Contrast.......................................... 92  
Copyright information................... 108  
Cord ......................... 3, 202, 209, 292  
Creative Auto ................................. 59  
B
B (Bulb).........................................123  
B/W...........................................91, 93  
Basic+.......................................68, 71  
314  
Index  
Creative filters...............................220  
Micon..............................................4  
Crop 640x480 ...............................180  
Cross-type focusing ........................79  
Custom Controls .....................45, 257  
Custom Functions.........................250  
File name...................................... 106  
File numbering.............................. 106  
File size .......................... 85, 181, 191  
Filter effect.............................. 93, 220  
Final image simulation.......... 155, 177  
Fine (Image-recording quality) ....... 84  
Firmware Ver. ............................... 280  
D
Flash  
Date/Time .......................................30  
DC coupler....................................272  
Depth-of-field preview...117, 155, 156  
Custom Functions.................... 138  
Effective range......................... 131  
External Speedlite.................... 148  
FE lock..................................... 134  
Flash control ............................ 135  
Flash exposure  
Dial  
Main Dial.....................................41  
Quick Control Dial.......................42  
compensation........................... 132  
Flash off ..................................... 58  
Flash-sync speed..... 130, 149, 253  
Manual flash..................... 136, 147  
Red-eye reduction.................... 131  
Shutter sync.  
Digital terminal ..............................236  
Dioptric adjustment .........................39  
Direct printing................................235  
Direct selection (AF point).............255  
DPOF............................................245  
Drive mode......................................81  
Dust Delete Data...........................231  
(1st/2nd curtain)....................... 137  
Wireless ................................... 139  
Flash exposure compensation ..... 132  
Flash mode................................... 136  
Flash-sync contacts........................ 16  
Focus confirmation light ................. 54  
Focus lock ...................................... 56  
Focus mode switch........... 34, 80, 167  
E
Electronic level..............................127  
Erase (image) ...............................215  
Error codes ...................................291  
Evaluative metering ......................119  
Exposure compensation ...............120  
Exposure level increments............252  
Exposure simulation......................158  
Extension ......................................107  
External Speedlite.........................148  
Eyecup..........................................124  
Eye-Fi card....................................273  
Eyepiece cover .......................23, 124  
Focusing  
AF mode .................................... 76  
AF point selection .............. 78, 255  
AF-assist beam.......................... 79  
Beeper ..................................... 278  
Difficult-to-focus subjects ... 80, 164  
Manual focusing................. 80, 167  
Out of focus............ 38, 39, 80, 164  
Recompose................................ 56  
Folder Create/Select .................... 104  
Format............................................ 48  
Format (card initialization).............. 48  
Frame rate.................................... 180  
F
Faithful ............................................91  
FE lock..........................................134  
FEB...............................................136  
315  
Index  
Full Auto..........................................54  
Full HD..........................................171  
Full High-Definition .......180, 202, 209  
Function availability table..............276  
Image area..................................... 36  
Image dust prevention.................. 229  
Image review time.......................... 50  
Image Stabilizer (lens).................... 38  
Image transfer.............................. 273  
Image verification data................. 260  
Image-recording quality.................. 84  
Index display ................................ 194  
G
Grainy B/W ...................................221  
Grid display...........................157, 185  
H
ISO speed .............. 88, 175, 251, 267  
Auto ........................................... 89  
ISO expansion ......................... 252  
Setting increments................... 252  
HDMI.....................................202, 209  
HDMI CEC....................................211  
High ISO speed noise reduction...254  
High-Definition ..............180, 202, 209  
Highlight alert................................192  
Highlight detail loss.......................192  
Highlight tone priority............183, 255  
Histogram (Brightness/RGB) ........193  
Hot shoe .......................................149  
Household power outlet................272  
J
JPEG.............................................. 84  
Jump display ................................ 195  
L
Landscape................................ 63, 90  
Language selection........................ 31  
Large (Image-recording quality)..... 85  
I
LCD monitor............................. 13, 27  
Brightness adjustment ............. 217  
Image playback........................ 189  
Menu screen...................... 46, 278  
Shooting settings display......... 267  
Vari-Angle ............................ 27, 57  
ICC profile.....................................110  
Illumination (LCD panel) .................43  
Image  
AF point display........................193  
Auto playback...........................207  
Auto rotate................................218  
Erased......................................215  
Highlight alert ...........................192  
Histogram.................................193  
Index.........................................194  
Jump display  
LCD panel ...................................... 18  
Lens ......................................... 21, 34  
Lock release .............................. 35  
Peripheral illumination  
correction................................. 102  
(Image browsing)......................195  
Magnified view..........................196  
Manual rotate ...........................197  
Playback...................................189  
Processing................................219  
Protect......................................213  
Quick Control................44, 67, 200  
Shooting information ................191  
View on TV.......................202, 209  
316  
Index  
Live View shooting..................57, 151  
Exposure simulation .................158  
Face detection  
Movie............................................ 171  
AF mode .......................... 179, 182  
Editing...................................... 206  
Editing first/last scene.............. 206  
Enjoying ................................... 202  
File size.................................... 181  
Frame rate ............................... 180  
Grid display.............................. 185  
Information display................... 176  
Manual exposure ..................... 174  
Metering timer.......................... 185  
Movie recording size................ 180  
Playback .................................. 204  
Quick Control ........................... 179  
Recording time......................... 181  
Silent shooting ......................... 185  
Sound recording....................... 184  
Still photo shooting................... 178  
View on TV....................... 202, 209  
Live mode (AF).........................161  
Grid display...............................157  
Information display ...................154  
Live mode (AF).........................160  
Manual focusing .................80, 167  
Metering timer...........................159  
Possible shots ..........................153  
Quick Control............................156  
Quick mode (AF) ......................165  
Silent shooting..........................159  
Long exposure noise reduction.....254  
Long exposures ............................123  
M
M (Manual exposure)....................118  
Magnified view ..............167, 196, 225  
Main Dial.........................................41  
Malfunction....................................283  
Manual exposure ..................118, 174  
Manual focusing......................80, 167  
Manual reset .................................107  
Manual selection (AF).....................78  
Maximum burst .........................85, 87  
Multi-controller.......................... 43, 78  
My Menu....................................... 261  
N
Neutral............................................ 91  
Night Portrait .................................. 66  
Noise reduction  
High ISO speed........................ 254  
Long exposures ....................... 254  
Medium  
Nomenclature................................. 16  
Non-Canon flash units.................. 149  
Normal (Image-recording quality)... 84  
NTSC............................ 180, 212, 280  
No................................................. 106  
(Image-recording quality)........85, 222  
Memory card.............................32, 48  
Menu...............................................46  
Menu settings ...........................278  
My Menu...................................261  
Setting procedure .......................47  
O
3icon .........................................4  
Metering mode..............................119  
MF (Manual focusing).............80, 167  
Miniature effect .............................221  
Mirror lockup .........................125, 257  
Mode Dial..................................20, 41  
Monochrome image ..................68, 93  
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) ............ 76  
One-Shot AF .................................. 76  
P
P (Program AE)............................ 112  
PAL............................... 180, 212, 280  
Partial metering ............................ 119  
317  
Index  
Peripheral illumination correction..102  
Personal white balance...................98  
PictBridge .....................................235  
Picture Style.............................90 - 95  
Pixels ..............................................84  
Playback .......................................189  
Portrait ......................................62, 90  
Possible shots...................29, 85, 153  
RAW image processing  
with the camera............................ 224  
RAW+JPEG ................................... 84  
Recharge........................................ 24  
Recharge performance (Battery).. 268  
Red-eye reduction........................ 131  
Release shutter without card.......... 32  
Remote control shooting ...... 124, 126  
Remote switch.............................. 124  
Resize .......................................... 222  
Rotate (image) ............. 197, 218, 243  
Power  
Auto power off ............................50  
Battery check..............................29  
Battery info. ..............................268  
Household power .....................272  
Possible shots ..............29, 85, 153  
Recharge....................................24  
S
Safety shift ................................... 253  
Safety warnings............................ 305  
Saturation....................................... 92  
SD card .................................... 32, 48  
SDHC and SDXC cards ................. 32  
Self-timer.................................. 67, 82  
Sensor cleaning ........................... 229  
Sepia (Monochrome)................ 68, 93  
Sharpness...................................... 92  
Shoot by ambience selection ......... 68  
Shoot by lighting or scene type...... 71  
Shooting information display........ 191  
Pressing completely........................40  
Pressing halfway.............................40  
Print ..............................................235  
Printing..........................................235  
Layout.......................................239  
Paper settings ..........................239  
Print Order (DPOF) ..................245  
Printing effects..........................240  
Tilt correction............................243  
Trimming...................................243  
Program AE ..................................112  
Program shift............................113  
Shooting mode............................... 20  
Av (Aperture-priority AE).......... 116  
B (Bulb).................................... 123  
M (Manual exposure)............... 118  
P (Program AE) ....................... 112  
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)............ 114  
1 (Full Auto)............................ 54  
7 (Flash Off)............................ 58  
C(Creative Auto) .................... 59  
2 (Portrait)................................ 62  
3 (Landscape)......................... 63  
4 (Close-up)............................. 64  
5 (Sports)................................ 65  
6 (Night Portrait) ...................... 66  
k(Movie shooting)................ 171  
Protect (image erase-protection) ..213  
Q
Q(Quick Control)............44, 67, 200  
Quick Control....................44, 67, 200  
Quick Control Dial...........................42  
Quick mode (AF)...........................165  
R
Rating ...........................................198  
Rating mark ..................................198  
RAW .........................................84, 86  
RAW image processing ................224  
318  
Index  
Shooting settings display ........43, 267  
Shutter button .................................40  
Shutter sync..................................137  
Shutter-priority AE.........................114  
Silent shooting ......................159, 185  
Single image display.....................190  
Single shooting .........................61, 81  
Single-point AF ...............................78  
Slide show.....................................207  
Volume (Movie playback) ............. 205  
W
WB.................................................. 96  
White balance................................. 96  
Bracketing................................ 100  
Correction .................................. 99  
Custom....................................... 97  
Personal..................................... 98  
Wind filter ..................................... 185  
Wireless remote control................ 126  
Small  
(Image-recording quality)........85, 222  
Soft focus......................................221  
Sports..............................................65  
Spot metering................................119  
sRGB ............................................110  
Stopped-down  
aperture.........................117, 155, 156  
Strap ...............................................23  
System map..................................292  
T
Tone priority ..........................183, 255  
Toning effect (Monochrome) ...........93  
Toy camera effect..........................221  
Trimming (printing)........................243  
Tripod socket ..................................17  
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) .................114  
U
UNLOCK button..............................42  
USB (Digital) terminal ...................236  
User settings.................................262  
V
Vari-Angle LCD monitor ............27, 57  
Video system ................180, 212, 280  
View on TV............................202, 209  
Viewfinder .......................................19  
Dioptric adjustment.....................39  
Electronic level .........................127  
319  
CANON INC.  
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan  
Europe, Africa & Middle East  
CANON EUROPA N.V.  
PO Box 2262, 1180 EG Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
CANON UK LTD  
CANON NEDERLAND N.V.  
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61,  
1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
Helpdesk: 020 7219 103  
www.canon.nl  
For technical support, please contact the Canon Help Desk:  
Canon UK, RCC Customer Service  
Unit 130, Centennial Park, Elstree, Herts, WD6 3SE, UK  
Helpdesk: 0844 369 0100 (5pence/min from a BT landline, other costs may vary)  
Fax: 020 8731 4164  
CANON DANMARK A/S  
www.canon.co.uk  
Knud Højgaards Vej 1, DK-2860 Søborg, Denmark  
Helpdesk: 70 20 55 15 (0,25 DKK + 0,25 DKK/min)  
Fax: 70 155 025  
CANON FRANCE SAS  
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer  
92414 Courbevoie cedex, France  
Hot line 0170480500  
www.canon.dk  
CANON NORGE as  
www.canon.fr  
Hallagerbakken 110, Postboks 33, Holmlia, 1201 Oslo, Norway  
Helpdesk: 23 50 01 43 (0,89 NOK + 0,49 NOK/min)  
www.canon.no  
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH  
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany  
Helpdesk: 069 2999 3680  
CANON OY  
www.canon.de  
Kuluttajatuotteet, Huopalahdentie 24, PL1, 00351 Helsinki, Finland  
Helpdesk: 020 366 466 (0,0821 €+ 0,0149 €/min)  
www.canon.fi  
CANON ITALIA S.P.A.  
Via Milano 8, I-20097 San Donato Milanese (MI), Italy  
Servizio clienti: 848 800519 (0,0787 €+ 0,0143 €/min)  
Fax: 02-8248.4600  
CANON SVENSKA AB  
Gustav III:s Boulevard 26, S-169 88 Solna, Sweden  
Helpdesk: +46 (0)8 519 923 69 (0,23 SEK + 0,45 SEK/min)  
Fax: +46 (0)8 97 20 01  
www.canon.it  
CANON ESPAÑA S.A.  
www.canon.se  
Avenida de Europa nº 6. 28108 Alcobendas (Madrid)  
Helpdesk: 901.900.012 (€0,039/min)  
Fax: (+34) 91 411 77 80  
CANON (SCHWEIZ) AG  
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, Switzerland  
Helpdesk: 0848 833 838 (0,08 CHF/min)  
www.canon.ch  
www.canon.es  
CANON BELGIUM N.V. / S.A.  
Berkenlaan 3, B – 1831 Diegem, Belgium  
Helpdesk : (02) 620.01.97 (0,053 € + 0,053 €/min)  
Fax: (02) 721.32.74  
CANON AUSTRIA GmbH  
Oberlaaer Strasse 233, A – 1110 Wien, Austria  
Helpdesk: 0810 081009 (0,07 €/min)  
www.canon.at  
www.canon.be  
CANON PORTUGAL, S.A.  
CANON LUXEMBOURG S.A.  
Rue des Joncs 21, L-1818 Howald, Luxembourg  
Helpdesk : 27 302 054 (0,12 €/min)  
Fax: (352) 48 47 96232  
Rua Alfredo Silva, 14 - Alfragide, 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal  
Helpdesk: +351 21 42 45 190 (€0,0847 + €0,031/min)  
www.canon.pt  
www.canon.lu  
WEB SELF-SERVICE: www.canon-europe.com  
This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of August 2010. For information on  
the camera’s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after this  
date, contact any Canon Service Center.  
CEL-SQ1LA210  
© CANON INC. 2010  
PRINTED IN THE EU  

ARC Audio FD6935 User Manual
Ariston EURO COMBI 47 116 10 User Manual
Bassworx BSX Series User Manual
Blaupunkt CASABLANCA CD52 7 642 295 310 User Manual
Clarion XH5210 User Manual
Digital Concepts 418AF User Manual
Directed Video OHC100 User Manual
Hitachi WL 201 User Manual
HP (Hewlett Packard) 40G User Manual
JVC GET0067 001A User Manual